Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Cooper
Cooper S
John Cooper
Works
Congratulations on your new MINI
This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of
this vehicle. It should stay with the vehicle when sold to provide
the next owner with important operating, safety and mainte-
nance information.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
© 2009 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/09, 08 03 450
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
3
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
CONTENTS
The fastest way to find information on a particu-
lar topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 212.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
6 Reporting safety defects
AT A GLANCE
10 Cockpit
16 Onboard monitor
20 Voice activation system
CONTROLS
26 Opening and closing
42 Adjustments
48 Transporting children safely
51 Driving
60 Everything under control
75 Technology for driving comfort
and safety
88 Lamps
92 Climate
95 Practical interior accessories
DRIVING TIPS
102 Things to remember when driving
NAVIGATION
112 Starting the navigation system
114 Destination entry
126 Destination guidance
135 What to do if …
ENTERTAINMENT
138 On/off and settings
141 Radio
149 CD player and CD changer
155 AUX-In port
156 USB-audio interface
MOBILITY
162 Refueling
164 Wheels and tires
175 Under the bonnet
179 Maintenance
181 Care
185 Replacing components
196 Giving and receiving assistance
REFERENCE
202 Technical data
207 Short commands for the voice activation
system
212 From A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's
Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you wish to sell your MINI at some time in
the future, remember to hand over this Owner's
Manual to the new owner; it is an important part
of the vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your MINI
Dealer will be glad to advise you at any time.
You can find more information about the MINI,
for example on its technology, on the Internet at
www.MINI.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you in
gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of infor-
mation.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific
equipment and optional accessories, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele-
vant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
The individual vehicle
The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayerische
Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW AG.
When you ordered your MINI, you chose various
items of equipment. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment that the manufacturer of your MINI makes
available with a specific model range.
Bear in mind that the manual may contain infor-
mation on accessories and equipment that you
have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections
describing options and special equipment are
marked by asterisks
* to assist you in identifying
possible differences between the descriptions in
this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.
If your MINI features equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, observe the enclosed Sup-
plementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
The manufacturer pursues a policy of continu-
ous, ongoing development that is conceived to
ensure that MINI vehicles continue to embody
the highest quality and safety standards com-
bined with advanced, state-of-the-art technol-
ogy. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional
cases that features described in this Owner's
Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
5
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
For your safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance and
repair methods. Therefore, have the necessary
work on your MINI only carried out by a MINI
Dealer or a workshop that has specially trained
personnel working in accordance with the spec-
ifications of the MINI manufacturer. If this work
is not carried out properly, there is a danger
of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by the manu-
facturer of the MINI.
When you purchase accessories tested
and approved by the manufacturer of the MINI
and Original MINI Parts, you simultaneously
acquire the assurance that they have been thor-
oughly tested by the manufacturer of the MINI
to ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
The manufacturer of the MINI warrants these
parts to be free from defects in material and
workmanship.
The manufacturer of the MINI will not accept any
liability for damage resulting from installation of
parts and accessories not approved by the man-
ufacturer of the MINI.
The manufacturer of the MINI cannot test every
product made by other manufacturers to verify
if it can be used on a MINI safely and without risk
to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occu-
pants.
Original MINI Parts, MINI Accessories and other
products approved by the manufacturer of the
MINI, together with professional advice on using
these items, are available from all MINI Dealers.
Installation and operation of non-MINI
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or sim-
ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage to
the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with
the vehicle's electrical system or affect the valid-
ity of the MINI Limited Warranty. See your MINI
Dealer for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems
may be performed by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using any certified
automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-
ductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your MINI is covered by the following war-
ranties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Notes
6
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating condi-
tions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable warranty
limitations or exclusions for such country or
region. In such case, please contact Customer
Relations for further information.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood,
New Jersey 07675-1227,
Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or MINI of North
America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada,
ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks
Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: Controls and displays
1 Adjusting the exterior mirrors, folding them
in and out
* 46
2
Parking lamps 88
Low beams 88
Automatic headlamp control
* 88
Turn signals 55
High beams 89
Headlamp flasher 55
Roadside parking lamps
* 89
Computer
* 61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
11
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
3 Always Open Timer 62
7 Ignition lock 51
8 Buttons* on steering wheel
9 Horn: the entire surface
10 Adjusting the steering wheel 47
11 Releasing the bonnet 175
4 Tachometer 12
Instrument lighting 90
Resetting the trip odometer 60
5
Wiper system 56
6
Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 51
Continuing cruise control
* 58
Right:
Storing speed and accelerating
or decelerating
Left:
Increase or reduce volume
Activating/deactivating cruise
control
* 58
Telephone
*:
> Press: accepting and ending
a call, starting dialing
* of
selected phone number and
redialing if no phone number
is selected
> Press longer: redialing
Activating/deactivating voice
activation system
* 20
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Scrolling through phone book and
lists with stored phone numbers
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Displays
1 Tachometer 60
with indicator and warning lamps 13
2 Display for
> Clock 60
> Outside temperature 60
> Current vehicle speed 60
> Indicator and warning lamps 13
3 Resetting the trip odometer 60
4 Display for
> Position of automatic transmission
* 53
> Computer
* 61
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 65
> Odometer and trip odometer 60
> Initializing the Flat Tire Monitor
* 79
> Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor
* 81
> Settings and information 64
> Personal Profile settings 26
5 Instrument lighting 90
6 Speedometer
with indicator and warning lamps 13
7 Control Display 16
8 Fuel gauge 61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
13
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Indicator and
warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in var-
ious combinations and colors in indicator area
1 or 2.
Some lamps are checked for proper functioning
and thus come on briefly when the engine is
started or the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
You can call up more information, e.g. on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, page 70.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps in display area 1
indicate certain functions:
High beams/headlamp flasher 89
Fog lamps
* 90
Rear fog lamp
* 90
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the drive
forces in order to maintain driving
stability 76
Parking brake applied 52
Engine malfunction with adverse effect
on exhaust emissions 180
Cruise control 58
Turn signals 55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
15
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
1 MINI: Microphone for voice processing sys-
tem
* and for hands-free telephone*
MINI Convertible: Microphone in the steer-
ing column
2 Indicator/warning lamp
* for front passen-
ger airbags 86
4 Hazard warning flashers
5 Speedometer 12
6 Drive for audio CDs
7 Cover of navigation DVD drive 112
> Switching audio sources on/off and
adjusting volume
8 Automatic climate control
9 Switches in center console
10 AUX-In port, USB-audio
interface
* 155, 156
11 Driving stability control systems
> Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76
> Dynamic Traction Control
DTC* 77
12 Changing to a different menu on the Control
Display 17
13 MINI joystick 16
Move in four directions, turn or press
14 Opening the start menu on the Control
Display 17
15 Sport button
* 78
3
Reading lamps
* 91
Color of ambient lighting
* 91
Glass sunroof, electric
* 35
MINI Convertible: opening and
closing the sliding/tilting roof 37
Interior lamps 90
Changing the radio station or track
Changing the audio source
Changing the frequency
Temperature 93
Air distribution to the
windshield 93
Air distribution to the upper body
area 93
Air distribution to the footwell 93
Automatic air distribution and
flow rate 93
Recirculated-air mode 93
Maximum cooling 93
Air flow rate 93
Defrosting windows 94
Cooling function
* 94
Rear window defroster 94
Windshield heating 94
Seat heating
* 45
Power windows 35
MINI Convertible: central power
window unit 36
Rear fog lamp
* 90
Fog lamps
* 90
Central locking system, inside 30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Onboard monitor
16
Onboard monitor
The onboard monitor integrates the functions of
a large number of switches. This allows these
functions to be operated from a single central
position. The following section provides an
introduction to basic menu navigation. The con-
trol of the individual functions is described in
connection with the relevant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display 16
2 MINI joystick
The MINI joystick can be used to select menu
items and to adjust settings:
> Move in four directions, arrows 5
> Turn, arrow 6
> Push, arrow 7
3 Opening start menu 17
4 Changing to another menu 17
Operate the MINI joystick only when traf-
fic and road conditions allow this, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other road
users by being distracted.<
Menu overview
Navigation
> Navigation system
> Onboard information, e.g. for displaying the
average fuel consumption
Communication*
> Telephone, refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player and CD changer
*
> AUX-In port, USB-audio interface* for exter-
nal audio device
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
17
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Setup
> Switching off Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of service requirements and
dates for statutory emissions and vehicle
inspections
> Check Control
Operating principle
As of radio readiness, the following message
appears on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the MINI joystick.
The start menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Start menu
All onboard monitor functions can be called up
via four menu items.
Opening start menu
Press the button.
To open the start menu from the Setup menu:
Press the button twice.
Calling up menu items in the start menu
Via the start menu you can call up the four menu
items of Navigation, Communication, Entertain-
ment and Setup: move the MINI joystick forward
or backward or press it. Depending on the selec-
tion, the menu last opened is displayed.
Changing between menu items
Press the button.
Pressing the button repeatedly opens the Com-
munication, Navigation and Entertainment
menu items in succession. The screen that was
last open is displayed.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is subdivided into fields.
2 White symbol: the field is active.
Gray symbol: the field is inactive.
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-
tal or vertical lists.
2 Additional menu items can be selected in
this field.
3 Settings are represented graphically or as
numerical values.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Onboard monitor
18
4 A curved line shows that menu items can be
selected in lists. The beginning and end of a
list are each marked by a circle.
Operating principle at a glance
The following is a general description of opera-
tions using the onboard monitor.
For an exemplary step-by-step application, refer
to Setting the time, page 68.
1 Highlighting a menu item:
> Turn the MINI joystick; the highlight
marker moves
> Menu items that are displayed in color on
the Control Display can be highlighted
2 Confirming a menu item:
> Press the MINI joystick
> New menu items are displayed or the
function is executed
> Select a function by highlighting and con-
firming it
3 Highlighting a menu item: refer to 1
4 Switching between fields:
> Briefly move the MINI joystick to the left,
right, forward or backward
> Release the MINI joystick
5 Adjusting settings:
> Turn the MINI joystick
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirm by switching to another field
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
19
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD and external audio source
* or
> Telephone
* in "Communication":
Name of the connected mobile phone,
network search or no network
2 Entertainment audio output off or
display for traffic information
*:
> "TI":
Reception of traffic information for the navi-
gation system is possible and is switched on
3 Display for:
> New entries present in
"Missed calls
"*
> Roaming active
4 It is possible to make calls
* if the mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle
Reception strength of mobile phone
network, depending on mobile phone
5 Time
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or entries via
the voice activation system
*.
Switching control
display off/on
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Display off".
To switch on, press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Voice activation system
20
Voice activation system
The concept
The voice activation system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems without
removing your hands from the steering wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. It is not necessary
to use the MINI joystick.
The voice activation system transforms oral
commands into control signals for the selected
systems and provides support in the form of
instructions or questions.
Precondition
Via the onboard monitor, select the language in
which the voice activation system is operating,
so that the spoken commands can be identified.
Setting the onboard monitor language, page 73.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice
activation system is ready to receive spoken
commands.
2. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control
Display.
This symbol is displayed on the Control Dis-
play when you can enter additional commands.
If no further commands are possible, continue
*
{...} Say the specified commands word
for word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice
activation system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
21
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
by operating the item of equipment via the
onboard monitor.
Terminating or canceling voice
activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel or
Commands
Having the possible commands
read aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possible
commands related to the selected menu item
on the Control Display.
Having the possible commands read aloud:
For instance, if you have selected "CD", the com-
mands available for operating the CD player and
CD changer are read out.
Opening help
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
Calling up functions immediately via
short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions immediately, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, page 207.
Opening the start menu
Example: selecting a track
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
4. Press the button on the steering wheel.
{Cancel}
{Options}
{Help}
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
{Main menu}
2. {Entertainment}
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}
3. {CD}
The system says:
{{CD on}}
5. Select a track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Voice activation system
22
Notes
For information on voice control of the
telephone, refer also to the separate
Owner's Manual.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the
following:
> Pronounce the commands and digits
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses. The same
applies to spelling when entering a destina-
tion for navigation.
> Always speak the commands in the lan-
guage of the voice activation system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the stan-
dard pronunciation of the station name.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
26
Opening and closing
Keys/remote controls
Remote control
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is recharged when it is in the igni-
tion lock while the car is being driven. You
should therefore use each remote control at
least twice a year to maintain the charge status.
In vehicles equipped with convenient access
*,
the remote control contains a replaceable bat-
tery, page 35.
If more than one remote control unit is used, the
settings called up and implemented depend on
which remote control is recognized when the
car is unlocked, refer to Personal Profile,
page 26.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 179.
New remote controls
Your MINI Dealer can supply new remote con-
trols as additional units or as replacements in the
event of loss.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Driver's door, page 29.
> MINI Convertible: Glove compartment, refer
to page 96.
> MINI Convertible: Locking the rear seat
backrest 105.
Personal Profile
The concept
The functions of your MINI can be set individu-
ally. By means of Personal Profiles, most of these
settings are stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use. When you unlock the car, the
remote control is recognized and the settings
stored for it are called up and implemented.
This means that your settings will be activated
for you, even if in the meantime your car was
used by someone else with another remote con-
trol and the corresponding settings.
At most three remote controls can be set for
three different people. A prerequisite is that
each person uses a separate remote control.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is being unlocked 27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
27
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
> Automatic locking of the vehicle 30
> Triple turn signal activation 55
> Settings for the displays on the onboard
monitor, in the speedometer and in the
tachometer:
> 12h/24h mode of the clock 69
> Date format 70
> Brightness of the Control Display 74
> Language on the Control Display 73
> Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances
and temperature 65
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-
trol PDC
* 75
> Light settings:
> Pathway lighting 88
> Daytime running lamps 89
> Automatic climate control: activating/deac-
tivating the AUTO program, setting the tem-
perature, air volume and air distribution 93
> Entertainment:
> Audio volume 139
> Tone control 139
> Speed-dependent volume control 139
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for operation
whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Tailgate
> Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Via the door lock
*
> In cars with convenient access*, via the
door handles on the driver's and passen-
ger's sides.
The anti-theft system is also operated at the
same time. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-
dles. The remote control can also be used to
switch on/off the welcome lamps and interior
lamps. The alarm system
* is also activated or
deactivated, page 32.
Operating from inside
Button for central locking system, page 30.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
from outside
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside.
Take the key with you when you leave the vehi-
cle so that the vehicle can be opened from the
outside.<
Using the remote control
Unlocking
Press the button.
The welcome lamps and interior lamps come on.
Unlocking mode
You can also set which parts of the car are
unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote
control in use.
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
5. Select "Door locks".
6. Select "Central locking".
7. Select "Unlock button".
8. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock
the entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door"
Press the button once to unlock
only the driver's door and the fuel
filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
Convenient opening
Hold the button down.
The power windows are opened and the glass
sunroof* is raised. In the MINI Convertible, the
windows and the sliding sunroof are opened.
In order to open the convertible top of your MINI
Convertible: release button and push again until
the convertible top is completely open. The side
window remains open.
Convenient closing is not possible by
means of the remote control.<
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
Setting confirmation signals
To have the vehicle confirm when it has been
locked or unlocked.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
5. Select "Door locks".
6. Select "Confirmation".
7. Select the desired signal.
The signal is activated.
Acoustic signals can be selected in vehicles with
an alarm system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
29
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages, etc.
Unlocking the tailgate
Press the button.
When it is opened, the tailgate swings
upward and outward to the rear. Make
sure that adequate clearance is available before
opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out, do
not place the key down in the cargo bay. If the
tailgate was locked before opening, it will be
locked again after it is closed.
Before and after each trip, check that the tail-
gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis-
charged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
page 26.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Using the door lock
You can set which parts of the car are unlocked,
page 27.
When there is no alarm system
* or conve-
nient access
*, only the driver's door is
locked with the door lock.<
To lock all doors, the fuel filler door and the tail-
gate together:
With the doors closed, press the interior central
locking button, page 30 to lock the vehicle.
Unlocking and opening the driver or passenger
door, page 30.
Locking the vehicle.
> Lock the driver's door with the integrated
key via the door lock, or
> press the safety lock button on the pas-
senger's door and close the door from
the outside.
Convenient operation
With an alarm system* or convenient access*,
the windows and glass sunroof
* can be oper-
ated via the door lock.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
In the MINI Convertible, the convertible top
closes first, followed by the folding sunroof, and
finally the side windows close.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
During the roof closing process (in case of
the convertible top also during the open-
ing process) ensure no one gets pinched.
Releasing the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, the
driver's door can be unlocked or locked by turn-
ing the integrated key in the door lock to the end
positions.
Opening and closing:
from inside
The switch locks or unlocks the doors and tail-
gate when the doors are closed, but the anti-
theft system is not activated. The fuel filler door
remains unlocked
*.
Unlocking and opening
> Either unlock the doors together using the
switch for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of either door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Press the switch or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. Take
the key with you when you leave the vehicle
so that the vehicle can be opened from the
outside.<
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks. The setting is stored for the remote con-
trol in use.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
5. Select "Door locks".
6. Select "Central locking".
7. Select a menu item:
> "Relock if not opened"
The central locking system automatically
locks the vehicle after a short time when
no door has been opened.
> "Lock after driving"
The central locking system automatically
locks the vehicle as soon as you drive off.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Tailgate
To avoid damage, make sure there is
sufficient clearance before opening the
tailgate.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
31
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Opening
In some national-market versions, the tail-
gate cannot be unlocked using the remote
control unless the vehicle is unlocked first.<
Press the button in the handle, arrow, or the
button of the remote control, for an
extended period. The tailgate is unlocked and
can be opened.
MINI Convertible
The maximum load that may be placed on
the open trunk lid is 175 lbs/80 kg.<
Manual release in the MINI Convertible
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
also unlock the tailgate manually.
1. Use the integrated key and open the back-
rest 1 lock.
2. Press button 2 and fold down backrest
together with the belt strap.
3. Pull the handle, see arrow. The tailgate is
released.
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the tail-
gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
occur.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim panel of
the tailgate make it easier to pull it down.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
Alarm system*
The principle
The alarm system, when activated, reacts if:
> A door, the engine compartment lid or the
tailgate is opened
> There is movement inside the car
> The car's inclination changes, for instance if
an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the
wheels or to raise it prior to towing away
> There is an interruption in the power supply
from the battery
The alarm system briefly indicates unauthorized
entry or tampering by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
Arming and disarming
Whenever the car is locked or unlocked, the
alarm system is armed or disarmed.
Even when the alarm system is armed, you can
open the tailgate by means of the button
on the remote control.
When you subsequently close the tailgate it is
again locked and monitored.
On certain national-market versions,
unlocking via the door lock triggers off the
alarm.<
Panic mode*
You can activate the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button for at least two seconds.
Switching off the alarm:
Press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control.
> Insert the key fully into the ignition lock.
> In cars with convenient access
*, press the
button on the door lock.
Display on the revolution counter
When the system is armed, all LEDs pulse. After
approx. 16 minutes one LED flashes.
> LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed.
> One LED flashes at short intervals:
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is not
properly closed. Even if these are not closed
fully, the remaining items are deadlocked
and the LEDs pulse after approx. 10 seconds
for approx. 16 minutes. Afterwards, one LED
flashes.
The interior movement detector is not
activated.
> LEDs go out after the vehicle is unlocked:
No attempt was made to tamper with
the car.
> LEDs flash after unlocking until the key is
inserted in the ignition, but for no longer
than approx. 5 minutes: an attempt was
made to tamper with the car.
Tilt alarm sensor
The vehicle's inclination is monitored. The alarm
is triggered, for instance, if an attempt is made
to steal the car's wheels or tow it away.
Interior movement detector
Before the interior movement detector can
operate correctly, the windows and glass roof
must be closed.
MINI Convertible
The passenger compartment is monitored up to
the height of the seat's surface. This way, the
anti-theft alarm system including the interior
motion sensor are armed, even if the convertible
top is open. Falling objects, e.g. tree leaves, may
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
33
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
trigger a false alarm, refer to Avoiding false
alarms.
Avoiding false alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
detector can be switched off together.
This prevents false alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> When being transported on car-carrying
trains, ferries or trailers
> If pets are to remain inside the car
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior movement detector
> Press the button on the remote con-
trol twice in succession.
> Lock the vehicle twice with the integrat-
ed key.
LEDs flash in short succession for approx.
2 seconds.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
detector are switched off until the car is next
unlocked and locked.
Convenient access*
Convenient access enables you to enter your
vehicle without having to hold the remote con-
trol in your hand. All you need to do is wear the
remote control close to your body, e.g. in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects
the remote control within the immediate vicinity
or in the passenger compartment.
Convenient access supports the following
functions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Unlocking the tailgate by itself
> Starting the engine
> Convenient operation
> MINI Convertible: Convertible top operation
Functional requirements
> The vehicle or the tailgate can only be
locked when the vehicle detects that the
remote control currently in use is outside of
the vehicle.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started when the
vehicle detects that the remote control is
inside the vehicle.
> The doors and tailgate must be closed to
be able to operate the windows and glass
sunroof.
Comparison to standard remote controls
In general, there is no difference between using
convenient access or pressing the buttons on
the remote control to carry out the functions
mentioned above.
Instructions on opening and closing are found
starting on page 26.
Special features regarding the use of convenient
access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing the windows, the glass sunroof or
the convertible top, the system is checking
whether a remote control is inside the vehicle.
Repeat the opening or closing procedure, if nec-
essary.<
To unlock
Press button 1.
Convenient opening with the remote control,
refer to page 28.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Locking
Press button 1.
For convenient closing, press and hold button 1.
The power windows and the glass sunroof
* are
closed.
MINI Convertible: If a remote control is inside the
vehicle, windows and convertible top can be
opened and closed as soon as the remote is
operational.
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press the button on the outside of the tailgate.
If the vehicle detects that a remote control
has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo bay after the tailgate is
closed, the tailgate will reopen slightly. The haz-
ard warning flashers flash and an acoustic sig-
nal
* sounds.<
Windows and glass sunroof, electric*
If the engine is switched off, you can still operate
the windows and glass sunroof so long as a door
or the tailgate has not been opened.
If the doors and tailgate are closed again and the
remote control is located inside the vehicle, the
windows and the glass sunroof can be operat-
ed again.
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock to
be able to operate the windows or glass sunroof
when the engine is switched off and the doors
are open.
Switching on radio readiness
Switch on radio readiness by briefly pressing the
start/stop button, page 51.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch,
otherwise the engine will start.<
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can be
switched on when a remote control is inside the
vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
control into the ignition lock, page 51.
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, page 52.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition lock.
Before driving a vehicle with automatic
transmission into a car wash
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunction
Convenient access may malfunction due to local
radio waves.
If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the
buttons on the remote control or using the inte-
grated key.
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock
and start the engine.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp comes on when an
attempt is made to start the engine: the
engine cannot be started. The remote
control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunc-
tioning. Take the remote control with you inside
the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary,
insert another remote control into the igni-
tion lock.
The warning lamp comes on when the
engine is running: the remote control is
no longer inside the vehicle. After the
engine is switched off, the engine can only be
restarted within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp comes on and a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote
control.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
35
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Replacing the battery
The remote control for convenient access con-
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up.
3. Press the cover on to close.
Take the old battery to a battery collection
point or to your MINI Dealer.<
Glass sunroof, electric*
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is shut.
Take the key with you when you leave the car,
otherwise children could operate the sunroof
and possibly injure themselves.<
Raising
> Press the switch backward to the resistance
point and hold it there.
Both glass sunroofs are raised.
Releasing the switch stops the movement.
>
With the ignition switched on, press the
switch backward beyond the resistance point.
Both closed sunroofs are raised fully.
Pressing again stops the movement.
Opening, closing
With the ignition switched on and the glass sun-
roof raised, press the switch backward and hold
it there.
The front glass sunroof opens.
The rear glass sunroof is closed.
Releasing the switch stops the movement.
The glass sunroof can be closed in the same way
by pressing the switch forward.
The front glass sunroof remains in a raised posi-
tion. The rear glass sunroof is raised. Pressing on
the switch again closes both sunroofs com-
pletely.
Convenient operation via door lock or conve-
nient access, refer to page 28, 29, 34.
Roller sun blind
The roller sun blind can be opened and closed
independently of the glass sunroof.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass sunroof can only be raised. In this case,
have the system initialized. The manufacturer of
your MINI recommends that you have this work
done by your MINI Dealer.
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
If, after a window is opened and closed
several times in close succession, the win-
dow can only be closed and not opened, the sys-
tem is overheated. Let the system cool for sev-
eral minutes with the ignition switched on or the
engine running.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
Opening
> Press the switch downwards.
The window opens until you release the
switch.
> Tap the switch downwards.
As soon as the remote is ready, the windows
will open automatically. Tap the switch
again to stop the opening movement.
MINI: Closing
The window can be closed in the same way by
pressing the switch up.
MINI Convertible: Closing
In order to close the window, press the switch
up. The window closes until you release the
switch.
Electric power windows
initializing
If the battery was disconnected, e.g. for
changing batteries or vehicle storage,
reinitialize the power window switch, otherwise
the windows will not be lowered .
MINI Convertible: Opening the convertible top is
not possible.<
1. Close the doors.
2. Open both windows.
3. Close both windows.
In the event of a system malfunction, please
contact your MINI Dealer.
MINI Convertible: Central power
window unit
> Press the switch downwards.
First the rear windows, then the front win-
dows open until the button is released.
> Tap the switch downwards.
With ignition turned on: rear and front win-
dow open automatically.
Tap the switch again to stop the opening
movement.
To close the window, push the button upward
and hold.
Do not close the windows until the closing
procedure for the convertible top is fin-
ished. Otherwise it is not ensured that the side
windows will close properly against the rubber
seals of the convertible top. Convertible top,
refer to page 38.<
After switching off the ignition
When the ignition is switched off, the windows
can still be operated for approx. 1 minute as
long as no door is opened.
Take the key with you when you leave the
car, otherwise children could operate the
electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
MINI: Pinch protection system
This function does not apply to the MINI Con-
vertible.
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Even though there is the pinch protection
system, always ensure that the window's
travel path is clear, otherwise the safety system
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
37
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions,
such as thin objects, and the window would con-
tinue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise the
pinch protection system could be impaired.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the
windows, etc., prevents you from closing the
windows normally, the window can be closed
manually.
1. Press the switch upward and hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Press the switch upward again within
approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The
window closes without pinch protection.
Convertible top with
integrated sliding
sunroof
To conserve battery power, if possible
operate the convertible top only while the
engine is running.
Prior to closing the convertible top, check for
and remove all debris from the windshield
frame, otherwise the closing of the top may be
hampered.<
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
To open:
Press the switch backward until the desired posi-
tion or the end position is reached.
To close:
Press the switch forward.
The sliding sunroof can be operated up to a road
speed of 74 mph / 120 km/h.
Power convertible top
The fully automatic convertible top provides
protection from the weather, combined with
simple and easy operation.
So that you can get the most enjoyment out
of your MINI Convertible, here are some help-
ful tips:
> It is recommended that you close the con-
vertible top whenever the vehicle is parked.
The closed convertible top not only protects
the vehicle interior from damage due to
unforeseen bad weather, but also provides a
certain degree of protection against theft
Always keep your valuables inside the
locked luggage compartment, even if the
convertible top is closed.
> Do not mount any roof rack systems on the
convertible top.
> When opening the wet convertible top, e.g.,
after driving in the rain, water drops may
enter the luggage compartment. In order to
avoid water stains or soiling, remove all
objects from the luggage compartment, if
necessary.
If the temperature drops below +10 7/–
12 6 , do not operate the convertible top,
otherwise damages may occur.
Do not leave a wet convertible top open for
more than one day, since the humidity may
cause damages.
Do not place any objects on the convertible top,
as they could otherwise fall off while the con-
vertible top is being operated and result in prop-
erty damage or personal injury.
If the rollover protective system is extended, do
not operate the convertible top.
Always completely finish the operation of the
convertible top. Driving off before an opening or
closing procedure is completely finished can
lead to property damage or personal injury.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Do not reach into the moving parts during the
opening and closing procedure. Keep children
away from the pivoting range of the convert-
ible top.
For safety reasons, only operate the convertible
top while the vehicle is standing.<
While opening and closing, the convertible
top pivots upward. If operating the con-
vertible top inside a garage or under a bridge,
or similar low structure, ensure the minimum
clearance is 2 m, otherwise the vehicle may
be damaged.<
Before opening and closing
> Please observe the previous safety instruc-
tions.
> Please ensure the luggage compartment
roll-up cover is in its lowest position, refer to
page 105, otherwise the convertible top
cannot be opened.
> Ensure the cargo does not push against the
luggage compartment roll-up cover from
below.
> Ensure the tailgate is closed.
Opening and closing the convertible top
To open:
Press the switch backward in order to open the
sliding/tilting sunroof. Pressing the button again
opens the convertible top.
To close:
Press the switch forward.
Operating while driving
The convertible top may be opened or closed
while driving not faster than 20 mph/30 km/h.
While operating the convertible top, pay
close attention to the surrounding traffic,
otherwise an accident may happen. Try to avoid
operating the convertible top while reversing
the vehicle since the rear view is very limited
during the convertible top's movement. Do not
operate the convertible top when driving on
winding and rough roads or during windy
conditions.<
For better control
> The LED lights up during convertible top
operation until the opening or closing pro-
cedure is completely finished.
> The LED flashes after releasing the switch.
The opening or closing procedure has not
yet been completed. The procedure can be
continued in the desired direction by press-
ing the appropriate button.
> The indicator lamp Convertible top not
locked lights up and a message is indicated
on the Control Display.
Interruption
A convertible top which is not completely
open or closed is hazardous.<
The automatic movement is immediately inter-
rupted when the button for the convertible top
operation is released. The procedure can be
continued in the desired direction by pressing
the appropriate button
If the opening or closing procedure is inter-
rupted by releasing the respective button, the
convertible top stays in its current position for
several seconds before it slowly moves into a
more stable position. The procedure can be con-
tinued by pressing the appropriate button.
The opening and closing procedure is also
interrupted in case of a mechanical blockage.
In this case, in order to operate the convertible
top again:
1. Turn off the ignition and then switch it on
again.
2. Press the button to continue the procedure
in the desired direction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
39
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Opening and closing procedure
Do not interrupt and restart the closing
procedure several times one after
another, or the convertible top mechanism
could be damaged.<
If the convertible top can be moved in only
one direction after several consecutive
attempts to operate it, the convertible top sys-
tem has overheated. Allow the system to cool
down for approx. 4 minutes.<
If the battery was disconnected, e.g. for
changing batteries or vehicle storage,
reinitialize the power windows, refer to page 36.
Otherwise the windows cannot be lowered or
the convertible top cannot be opened.<
Convenient operation
For convenience operation using the remote
control refer to page 27, for operation via the
door lock refer to page 29.
Manual closing in the event of an
electrical malfunction
Only close the convertible top manually if
it is absolutely necessary. Never open it
manually. Improper handling of the convertible
top can result in damage. The closing procedure
must be completely finished. Otherwise, dam-
age or injury could result.<
Before closing
1. Remove allen key and screwdriver from ve-
hicle tools, refer to page 190.
2. Pry out luggage compartment lamp from
the left side trim using the screwdriver.
3. Use the screwdriver and turn the gold-col-
ored screw, see arrow, one and a half turns
in the direction of the arrow.
Releasing the convertible top
1. Push cover panel forward, see arrow 1.
2. In order to unlock the convertible top use
the allen key to loosen the screws of the
locking devices, see arrows 2.
3. Release the second side frame.
Closing the convertible top
1. Place both hands on the convertible top on
the respective side frame.
2. Lift out both sides at the same time, and
swing the convertible top forward onto
the cowl.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
3. Inside the vehicle, use a screwdriver to pry
out the cover in the center of the roof.
To close the sliding sunroof
1. Insert the hexagon wrench into the recess in
the center of the roof and push upward, see
arrow 1.
2. Turn the hexagon wrench in the direction of
arrow 2.
3. Open both locking mechanisms and remove
the locking pieces.
4. Insert the pins into the respective recess in
the cowl, see arrow.
To lock the convertible top
Turn hexagon wrench in the opposite direction
of arrow 2 until the convertible top is securely
locked.
Please contact your MINI Dealer to have
the electrical malfunction repaired.<
Wind deflector*
With the convertible top open, the wind deflec-
tor keeps air movement in the passenger com-
partment to a minimum, thus providing you with
a more pleasant drive, even at higher speeds.
Do not let the wind deflector come into
contact with pointy objects as these may
damage the net. No not place objects on the
installed wind deflector. When stowing the wind
deflector, ensure that it is not damaged by
objects.<
Before installing
1. Take the wind deflector out of the pouch.
2. Unfold the wind deflector, see arrows 1.
3. Press the locking device together until it
engages, see arrow 2.
Installing and folding up
1. Push out retaining pin 2 on one side until it
engages.
2. Insert wind deflector with retaining pins into
the openings 1 and 2 on that side of the
vehicle.
3. On the opposite side of the vehicle, insert
the retaining pin 1 into the opening, pushing
against the spring load.
4. Push out retaining pin 2 on one side until it
engages.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
41
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
5. Fold up the upper part of the wind deflector.
If a seat is in its rearmost position, do not
recline the backrest too far, otherwise the
wind deflector could be damaged.<
Removing and folding
Remove the deflector following the reverse
sequence.
Push the release lever towards the center of the
wind deflector and fold both halves together.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Adjustments
42
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital contri-
bution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-
junction with the safety belts, the head restraints
and the airbags, the seated position has a major
influence on your safety in the event of an acci-
dent. To ensure that the safety systems operate
with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to
observe the instructions contained in the follow-
ing section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 48.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms
in the event of the airbag being triggered off.
No one and nothing is to come between the air-
bags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Ensure
that the front passenger is correctly seated, e.g.
that no feet or legs are propped against the
dashboard. Otherwise, leg injury could result if
the front airbag suddenly deployed.
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not lean
against the cover of the head airbag of the MINI;
otherwise, serious injuries can result when the
airbag deploys.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circumstances.
The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a
mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individ-
uals. This effect is usually only temporary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 85.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 44.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passen-
ger's lap.
Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low
across the hips and does not press against the
abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against
the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over
hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the
safety belt so that it is pulled taut across the lap
and shoulder, fitting the body snugly without
any twists. Otherwise the belt could slide over
the hips in the event of a frontal collision and
injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing bulky cloth-
ing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body
area taut, otherwise its restraining effect could
be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 45.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
43
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a dan-
ger in the event of an accident of sliding under
the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor-
mally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 44 and on damaged safety belts
on page 46.
Seat adjustment
Observe the instructions on page 42 to
ensure the best possible personal pro-
tection.<
Longitudinal adjustment
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat to the
desired position, arrows 2.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages
properly.
Height
Pull up or push down the lever repeatedly,
arrows 1, until the desired height is reached,
arrows 2.
Backrest
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight to
the backrest or lift it off, as necessary, arrows 2.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the
curvature.
Entry to the rear
Convenient entry
The convenient entry feature includes a
mechanical memory function for the longitudi-
nal adjustment and backrest angle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Adjustments
44
1. Pull up the lever on the seat backrest,
arrow 1.
The backrest folds forward.
2. Move the seat forward by pushing on the
backrest, arrow 2.
Previous position
1. Push the seat back into its previous position.
Do not fold the backrest up until the
seat is in its previous position. Other-
wise, the seat will engage in its current posi-
tion. In this case, adjust the longitudinal po-
sition manually, page 43.<
2. Fold the backrest back up to lock the seat.
When moving the seat backwards, ensure
that you do not cause personal injury or
property damage.
Before driving off, engage the front seats and
seat backrests. Otherwise there is a risk of acci-
dent due to unexpected movement.<
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Only remove a head
restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in
question. Reinstall the head restraint before
transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise,
the passenger will be without protection from
the head restraint.<
Height adjustment
To raise: pull up.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint down.
Removing
MINI: Front
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.
3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint
out as far as it will go.
4. Fold back the backrest.
MINI Convertible: Front
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.
3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint
out as far as it will go.
4. Additionally press button 2 and pull the
head restraint out completely.
5. Fold back the backrest.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
45
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Rear
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint
out completely.
Seat heating*
Switching on
Press once for each temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
If you continue driving within the next 15 min-
utes, the seat heating is automatically activated
at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
Switching off
Press button longer.
Safety belts
Observe the instructions on page 42 to
ensure the best possible personal pro-
tection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Front and rear seats
Closing
Make sure you hear the lock engage in the belt
buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
erly, page 42.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
MINI Convertible: rear belt guide
Please ensure that the belt guide loop,
arrow, is locked when putting on the rear
seat belts.<
Seat belt reminder
Front seats
The indicator lamps come on and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. Check whether the safety belt has
been fastened correctly. The 'Fasten safety
belts' reminder is issued when the driver's safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Adjustments
46
belt has not been fastened. The 'Fasten safety
belts' reminder is also activated at road speeds
above approx. 5 mph or 8 km/h if the front pas-
senger's safety belt has not been fastened, if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat,
or if driver or front passenger unfasten their
safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or stressed
in an accident: have the safety belt system
and its seat-belt tensioners replaced and the
belt anchors checked. Have this work carried out
only by a MINI Dealer or by a workshop that has
specially trained personnel working in accor-
dance with the specifications of the MINI manu-
facturer, otherwise correct operation of these
safety systems is not ensured.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more con-
vex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise there is an increased risk of an
accident.<
1 Adjusting the left or right exterior mirror
2 Folding mirrors in and out
*
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press
the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
Turn the knob beyond the pressure point in
direction 2. The mirrors can be folded in at road
speeds up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for
example, or for moving mirrors that were folded
in by hand back out into their correct positions.
Automatic heating*
At outside temperatures below a certain limit,
both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
while the engine is running or the ignition
switched on.
Interior rearview mirror
To reduce glare from vehicles behind you when
you are driving at night:
Turn the knob.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming*
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
rearview mirror
* is controlled by two photo cells
in the mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror
frame, arrow; the other is on the back of the
mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions cor-
rectly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover
the area between the interior rearview mirror
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
47
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels
or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly
in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion, otherwise there
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move-
ment.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
distance and angle to suit your seated
position.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up, otherwise the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
48
Transporting children safely
The right place
for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening the
doors, for example.<
Children should always sit in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Only transport children under the age of
13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear
in a child-restraint system suitable for their age,
weight and size. Otherwise there is an increased
risk of injury in the event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child-restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Only install child seats in the rear when the
rear seat backrest is folded all the way
back and engaged. Otherwise there will be
an increased risk of injury in the event of an
accident.<
Exception for front passenger seat
Front passenger airbags
Should it be necessary to use a child-
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags must be deacti-
vated. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of
injury to the child if the airbags deploy, even if
the child is seated in a child-restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 86.
Child-restraint systems,
installation
Observe the child-restraint system manu-
facturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child-restraint systems. Oth-
erwise the protective effect may be dimin-
ished.<
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen-
ger are deactivated, otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Seat position
Before installing a child-restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up
*
as possible to obtain the best possible position
for the belt. Do not change the seat position
after this.
Child seat security
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be prevented from being
pulled out in order to secure child-restraint sys-
tems.
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child-restraint system with
the belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
49
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child-restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child-restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all
the way.
LATCH child-restraint
fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
To install and use the LATCH child-
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the system, otherwise the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
Anchor points for LATCH anchors
Before installing the child's seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.
The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors
are located behind the labeled protective caps.
Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors
are properly engaged and that the child-
restraint system rests firmly against the seat
backrest, otherwise the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
Child-restraint system with tether strap
Use the tether strap anchors to secure
child-restraint systems only, otherwise the
anchors could be damaged.<
There are two additional anchors for child-
restraint systems with tether straps, arrows.
Placement of the tether strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise
the strap will not properly secure the child-
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
MINI
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Tether strap hook
4 Cargo bay floor
5 Anchor
6 Seat backrest
7 Tether strap of the child-restraint system
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap between the head re-
straint holders.
3. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using
the hook.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
50
5. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using
the hook.
6. Pull the retaining strap tight.
MINI Convertible
Ensure that the upper strap 9 is passed
between the seat backrest 8 and the roll-
over protection system with cross bar 3; other-
wise, the strap will not be able to properly secure
the child-restraint system.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Rollover protection system with cross bar
4 Cargo bay cover
5 Cargo bay floor
6 Tether strap hook
7 Anchor
8 Seat backrest
9 Tether strap of the child-restraint system
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Unlock backrest and slightly fold forward,
see page 105.
3. Guide the tether strap between the head re-
straint holders.
4. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using
the hook.
5. Fold backrest back and lock in place. Push
headrest down as far as possible.
6. Pull the retaining strap tight.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
51
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Driving
Ignition lock
Inserting the key into the ignition lock
Insert the key all the way into the ignition lock.
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Removing the key from the ignition lock
Press in the key briefly. It is ejected slightly.
At the same time:
> The ignition is switched off if it was on
beforehand.
Automatic transmission
You cannot take out the key unless the selector
lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/stop button
Press the start/stop button to switch radio readi-
ness or the ignition on and off. Do not depress
the brake or clutch while doing so.
When you press the start/stop button and
depress the clutch if the car has manual
transmission or the brake if the car has auto-
matic transmission, the engine starts.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate. The
time and outside temperature are displayed in
the tachometer.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the key is removed from the igni-
tion lock
> When using convenient access
* by pushing
the button on the door handle or the
button on the remote control, refer to Lock-
ing on page 34
> After a certain has elapsed
Ignition on
Most indicator and warning lamps in indicator
area 1, page 13, light up for varying lengths
of time.
When the engine is off, switch off the igni-
tion and any unnecessary electrical con-
sumers in order to preserve the battery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps in the displays
go out.
The ignition automatically turns off
* when the
driver's door is opened. Pressing the start/stop
button again switches the ignition back on.
The ignition is not switched off in situations such
as the following:
> The clutch or brake is depressed
> The low beams are switched on
Starting the engine
Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed
spaces; otherwise inhalation of the nox-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Driving
52
ious exhaust gases can lead to unconsciousness
and death. Exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic
gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, otherwise such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car while the engine is run-
ning, place the transmission in neutral or move
the selector lever to position P and forcefully
apply the parking brake to prevent the car from
moving.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated start attempts in which
the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is
not burned or inadequately burned and there is
a danger of overheating and damaging the cat-
alytic converter.<
Do not let the engine warm up with the vehicle
at a standstill. Move off immediately at a moder-
ate engine speed.
When starting the engine, do not depress the
accelerator pedal.
Manual transmission
Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with conve-
nient access, refer to page 33.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch.
3. Press the start/stop button.
Automatic transmission
Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with conve-
nient access, refer to page 33.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Shift the selector lever into position P or N.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Switching off the engine
Always take the key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force-
fully, otherwise the vehicle could begin to roll.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/
stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Automatic transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, move the selector
lever to position P.
2. Press the start/stop button.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Before driving into a car wash
By following these steps, the vehicle is able
to roll:
1. Place the remote control, even with conve-
nient access, in the ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
53
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower
the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car,
do not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so,
continuously press the button of the parking
brake lever.
Otherwise, excessive force could lead to over-
braking and loss of traction, i.e. fishtailing, at the
rear axle.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission*
with Steptronic
In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can
shift gears manually using Steptronic, page 54.
Parking the vehicle
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always
select position P and apply the parking
brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running.<
Removing the key
1. Move the selector lever to position P.
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Remove the key.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the tachometer
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector lever position is displayed, or the
current gear in the manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions
> The selector lever can only be moved out of
position P if the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running: interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position, de-
press the brake until you are ready to start.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Driving
54
A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector
lever positions R and P.
Overriding the selector lever lock
Press the button on the front of the selector
lever, arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The transmission locks to prevent the drive
wheels from turning.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
Select this when you are in a car wash, for exam-
ple. The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operation conditions, fuel con-
sumption is lowest when you drive in position D.
Kick-down
Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Sport program and manual
operation M/S
Move the selector lever from position D to the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis-
played. This position is recommended for a per-
formance-oriented driving style.
To deactivate the sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Shifting with the selector lever
Push the selector lever forward or pull it back
to activate manual operation. Steptronic shifts
the gear.
> Pull the selector lever in the + direction.
Transmission shifts up.
> Push the selector lever in the – direction.
Transmission shifts down.
The tachometer displays M1 to M6.
To use the automatic mode again, move the
selector lever to the right into position D.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when
they will result in a plausible combination of
engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a
downshift that would cause the engine to over-
rev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is displayed briefly, followed by
the actual gear.
Shifting on the steering wheel*
With the selector lever in position D, automatic
drive, you can shift gears using the shift paddles
on the steering wheel. The transmission auto-
matically switches to manual mode.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
55
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
If you do not shift gears with the shift paddles or
accelerate for a certain amount of time, the
transmission automatically returns to D, auto-
matic drive.
> Pull one of the shift paddles.
Transmission shifts up.
> Push one of the shift paddles.
Transmission shifts down.
M1 to M6 is displayed in the gear indicator.
Manually unlock the selector lever lock
Should the selector lever refuse to move out of
position P even though the ignition is switched
on, the brake is depressed and the button on the
selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock
can be overridden:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever un-
til the sleeve is inside out. Disconnect the ca-
ble connector if necessary.
3. Take the hub cover remover 1 out of the on-
board tool kit and insert it in the loop on the
front passenger side.
4. Pull the loop up.
5. Move the selector lever into the desired po-
sition by pressing the button on the front of
the selector lever.
Only unlock the selector lever lock manu-
ally when the vehicle is to be towed. Do
not forget to firmly apply the parking brake prior
to the tow, otherwise the vehicle may roll
away.<
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 Turn signal indicator
2 Headlamp flasher
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the resis-
tance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that an indicator bulb
has failed.<
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
You can set whether the turn signal is to flash
once or three times.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Driving
56
5. Select "Lighting".
6. Select "Triple turn signal".
Triple turn signaling is activated.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent mode
or rain sensor
*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
Press button, arrow 3.
Deactivate the rain sensor before entering
an automatic car wash. Failure to do so
could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Adjusting the sensitivity of the
rain sensor
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 51.
2. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator
lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is dis-
played.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Briefly press the button repeatedly until the
symbol and "SET" are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
57
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Press the button to select the desired
sensitivity.
7. Wait, or press and hold the button until the
display changes.
The settings are stored.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
Brief wipe
Press the lever downward once, arrow 2.
Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated briefly.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on,
the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
In cars equipped with an alarm system, the
headlamps cannot be cleaned when the bonnet
is open.
Do not use the washers when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will
damage the washer pump.
Only use the washers if the bonnet has been
completely closed, otherwise the headlamp
washer system
* may be damaged. Do not use
the washers if there is any danger that the fluid
will freeze on the windshield. If you do, your
vision could be obscured. For this reason, use
antifreeze.<
Window washer nozzles
The window washer nozzles are heated auto-
matically
* while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.
MINI: Rear window wiper
0 Rear wipers parked
1 To switch on intermittent wipe :
Turn the cap to level 1.
Operation is continuous in reverse gear.
Cleaning the rear window
2 To clean the rear window during intermit-
tent wipe :
Turn the cap further to level 2 and hold it
there.
3 To clean the rear window when wipers are
parked :
Turn the cap to level 3 and hold it there.
Do not use the washers when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will
damage the washer pump.<
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources, store it only in the closed original con-
tainer and keep it out of reach of children, oth-
erwise there is a risk of personal injury. Comply
with the instructions on the container.<
Washer fluid reservoir
Only refill washer fluid that contains anti-
freeze when the engine is cool, to avoid
contact with hot engine parts. Otherwise, fluid
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Driving
58
spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to per-
sonal safety.<
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 2.6USquarts/2.5liters.
With headlamp washer system:
Approx. 4.8 US quarts/4.5 liters.
Cruise control*
The concept
Cruise control is available at vehicle speeds of at
least approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then
stores and maintains the speed that you specify
using the button on the steering wheel.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose con-
trol of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
Activating
1 Resuming cruise control
2 Activating/deactivating cruise control
3 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed
4 Maintaining, storing and decreasing speed
Indicator lamp in the speedometer lights up.
The cruise control system is ready and can be
activated.
Activating/deactivating cruise control
Press button 2.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When the brakes are applied
> When the clutch is depressed
> When the automatic transmission is in selec-
tion lever position N
> When the driving stability control system is
active
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Maintaining current speed
Press button 3.
The system maintains and stores the current
vehicle speed.
If, on a downhill grade, the engine braking effect
is not sufficient, the controlled speed may be
exceeded. On uphill grades vehicle speed may
drop if the engine output is insufficient.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
59
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Increasing speed
Press button 3 repeatedly until the desired
speed is reached. Every time you press the but-
ton, the speed increases by approx. 1 mph or
approx. 2 km/h.
Accelerating using the button
Press and hold button 3.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the
accelerator pedal. After the button is released,
the driving speed is maintained and stored.
Decreasing speed
Press button 4 repeatedly until the desired
speed is reached.
The functions here are the same as for increas-
ing the speed or accelerating, except that the
speed will be decreased.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press button 1.
The last speed stored is achieved again and
maintained.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Display in tachometer*
Selected speed is displayed briefly.
If --- mph or --- km/h is displayed briefly
in the tachometer, the conditions neces-
sary for operation may not be fulfilled.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp in the tachometer
lights up if the system fails. A message
appears on the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
60
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature
display, clock
1 Outside temperature display and clock or
current speed
2 Odometer and trip odometer
3 Resetting the trip odometer
Units of measure
Select the respective units of measure, miles or
km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the
outside temperature, page 65.
Outside temperature display, time
Setting the time, refer to page 68.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above +377/+36. Therefore, drive
carefully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in
the shade, otherwise there is an increased acci-
dent risk.<
Current vehicle speed
To have the current speed shown in the upper
display otherwise serving for the outside tem-
perature display and clock.
1. Press the button in the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until the current speed appears
in the lower display.
2. Wait for the speed display to automatically
move to the upper display.
The outside temperature then appears in the
lower display.
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting the trip odometer
With the ignition switched on, press knob 3 in
the tachometer.
When the vehicle is parked
To display the time, outside temperature and
odometer briefly after the key is removed from
the ignition lock:
Press knob 3 in the tachometer.
Tachometer
Never operate the engine with the needle in the
red overspeed zone of the gauge. In this range,
the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
61
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi-
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis-
play.
Check coolant level, refer to page 177.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 13.2 US gallons/50 liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 162.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone
of approx. 2.1 US gallons/8 liters the remaining
indicator lamps change from orange to red,
arrow, and a message is displayed briefly on the
Control Display. The tachometer
displays the
remaining cruising range. When the range is less
than approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message
remains in the Control Display.
If the range displayed is less than
30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-
wise engine functions are not guaranteed and
damage could occur.<
Computer*
Displays in tachometer
Press the button in the turn indicator lever
repeatedly to call up various items of infor-
mation.
The following items of information are displayed
in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption
> Average speed
> Current vehicle speed
> MINI Convertible: Always Open Timer
To set the corresponding units of measure, refer
to Units of measure on page 65.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
If the range displayed is less than
30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-
wise engine functions are not guaranteed and
damage could occur.<
Average fuel consumption
Calculated for the time the engine has been
running.
With the trip computer, page 63, you can have
the average consumption for another trip dis-
played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
62
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn indicator lever for approx.
2seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption to allow
you to see whether your current driving style is
conducive to fuel economy with minimum
exhaust emissions.
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
With the trip computer, page 63, you can have
the average speed for another trip displayed.
To reset average speed: press the button in the
turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Current vehicle speed
To have the current speed shown in the upper
display otherwise serving for the outside tem-
perature display and clock.
1. Press the button in the turn indicator lever
repeatedly until the current speed appears
in the lower display.
2. Wait for the speed display to automatically
move to the upper display.
The outside temperature then appears in the
lower display of the computer.
Always Open Timer
If driving the MINI Convertible with its soft top
down, the driving times are displayed digitally
on the tachometer.
The following driving times are displayed:
> "Trip": actual driving time
> Total driving time
To reset the "Trip" display:Push the button on
the turn signal lever or the Reset trip distance
button for approx. 2 seconds, refer to page 12.
To reset the total driving time, contact your MINI
Dealer.
Analog Always Open Timer
The analog Always Open Timer indicates the
number of hours and minutes that you drove
with the convertible top down. A maximum of
6 hours and 59 minutes can be displayed.
The total driving time is displayed digitally in the
tachometer.
1 LED hour display
2 Minute display
Displays on the Control Display
To open the computer via the onboard monitor,
basic operation on page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Naviga-
tion" and press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
63
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "Car Data".
4. Select "Onboard info".
> Estimated time of arrival at destination:
> Manually enter a distance in the com-
puter, refer to information further below
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-
tem, page 114
> Cruising range
> Distance to destination:
> Manually enter a distance in the com-
puter, refer to information further below
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-
tem, page 114
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Resetting values
To reset the values for the average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu entry.
2. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the
message.
Entering a distance manually
1. Select "Dist. to dest.".
2. Turn the MINI joystick to select the distance
to your destination.
3. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The distance is mandated automatically during
destination guidance.
Trip computer
The trip computer is suitable e.g. for a holi-
day trip.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Naviga-
tion" and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Car Data".
4. Select "Trip computer".
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
To switch trip computer on/off and to reset all
values to zero:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
64
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the third field from the top.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired menu item.
> "Start"
> "Stop"
> "Reset"
Settings and information
Operating principle
Certain settings and information are only avail-
able when the ignition is switched on, the vehi-
cle is at a standstill and the doors are closed.
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
> Confirming selected display or set values
> Calling up computer information 61
2 Calling up Check Control 70
3 Displaying vehicle check 71
4 Setting the time 68
5 Setting the date 69
6 Exiting the menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
65
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Exiting displays
1. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator
lever repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.
2. Press the button for a longer period.
The display again shows the outside tempera-
ture and the time.
Displays are also exited if no entries are made
for approx. 8 seconds.
Next setting or item of information
1. Within a setting or item of information,
briefly press the button in the turn indicator
lever repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.
2. Press the button for a longer period.
The display changes directly to the next setting
or item of information.
Units of measure
To set the units of measure. The settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use,
refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Language / Units".
5. Select "Units".
6. Select the menu item to be set.
7. Select the desired unit of measure.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are briefly displayed
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can be
read out from the remote control by your
MINI Dealer.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
66
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting information
2 Engine oil
3 Front brakes
4 Rear brakes
5 Vehicle check
6 Roadworthiness test
7 Brake fluid
8 Exit display 65
9 Next setting or item of information 65
More information on the MINI Maintenance
System can be found on page 179.
Supplementary information
You can have further information on the scope
of maintenance displayed on the Control Dis-
play, refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Info sources".
4. Select "Service Info".
5. Select "Service requirements".
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Select "
Status".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
67
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
A list of selected maintenance operations and, if
applicable, inspections required by law is dis-
played.
You can have further information displayed on
each entry:
Select an entry.
Exiting the menu
Select the arrow.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally
required inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, page 69, otherwise the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is
not ensured.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Info sources".
4. Select "Service Info".
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "Service require-
ments".
6. Select "Status".
7. Select "State inspection".
8. Select "Set service date".
The month is highlighted.
9. Turn the MINI joystick to make the adjust-
ment.
10. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
11. Turn the MINI joystick to make the adjust-
ment.
12. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
Exiting the menu
Select the arrow .
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
68
Clock
In the tachometer
Setting the time
1. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator
lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is dis-
played.
2. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
3. Briefly press the button repeatedly until the
symbol and "SET" are displayed.
4. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
5. Press the button to set the hours.
6. Wait for the display to change to minutes.
7. Press the button to set the minutes.
8. Wait for the display to change.
The settings are stored.
On the onboard monitor
Setting the time
1. Press the button once or twice until the
start menu appears.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Turn the MINI joystick until "Settings" is
selected and press the MINI joystick.
4. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
69
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
5. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time" is
selected and press the MINI joystick.
6. Turn the MINI joystick until "Set time" is
selected and press the MINI joystick.
7. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and
press the MINI joystick.
8. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and
press the MINI joystick.
The system accepts the new time.
Setting the time format
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Time / Date".
5. Select "Time".
6. Select "Time format".
7. Select the desired format.
Switching on the hour signal*
You will hear three tones just before each
full hour.
Select "Hour memo".
The hour signal is activated.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Date
In the tachometer
Setting the date
1. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator
lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is dis-
played.
2. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
3. Briefly press the button repeatedly until the
symbol and "SET" are displayed.
4. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
5. Press the button to set the day of the month.
6. Wait for the display to change to month.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
70
7. Set the month and year in the same way.
8. Wait for the display to change.
The settings are stored.
On the onboard monitor
Setting the date
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Time / Date".
5. Select "Date".
6. Select "Set date".
7. Turn the MINI joystick to make the adjust-
ment.
8. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The next setting is highlighted.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.
Setting the date format
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Time / Date".
5. Select "Date".
6. Select "Date format".
7. Select the desired format.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. Check Control messages
involve indicator and warning lamps in the dis-
play and, in some circumstances, an acoustic
signal as well as text messages at the bottom of
the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in var-
ious combinations and colors in the indicator
areas 1 and 2.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
71
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
For most Check Control messages, you can view
more information later, e.g. regarding the cause
of a malfunction and how to respond, refer to
page 72.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
To exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified.
They cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions
occur at the same time, they are displayed in
succession.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
Other Check Control messages are automatically
hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but remain
stored.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
This symbol indicates that Check Control
messages have been stored. Check Control mes-
sages can be viewed whenever it is convenient.
Viewing stored Check Control messages
Stored Check Control messages can only be dis-
played if the driver's door is closed.
1. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator
lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is dis-
played.
2. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
72
3. Press the button repeatedly until the display
shows the corresponding symbol and
"CHECK INFO".
4. Hold the button down.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages.
If a Check Control message has been stored,
the corresponding message is displayed. In
addition, the text message appears on the
Control Display.
5. Briefly press the button to check for other
messages.
Viewing more information later
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Info sources".
4. Select "Service Info".
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "Check Control
messages".
6. Select a text message.
Exit display:
Select the arrow.
Speed limit
Enter a speed, and a Check Control message will
indicate when you reach this speed. This enables
you, for example, to receive warnings if you
exceed a speed limit in an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the limit
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Naviga-
tion" and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Car Data".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
73
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
4. Select "Limit".
5. Select "Change limit:".
6. Turn the MINI joystick to set the limit.
7. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
The limit is automatically activated.
Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed".
The system adopts your current speed as
the limit.
Activating the limit
Select "On".
Limit is activated.
Stopwatch
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Naviga-
tion" and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Car Data".
4. Select "Stopwatch" .
Starting, stopping or resetting
> Select "Start".
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset".
The stopwatch is reset and restarts if it was
running beforehand.
> Select "Stop".
This stops the timer.
Taking an interim time reading
Select "Interim time".
The interim time appears below the ongoing pri-
mary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain available
at all times while the stopwatch is running. The
stopwatch continues operation in the back-
ground.
Altering settings
Language on the Control Display
The language of the Control Display can be set.
Refer to the basic principles on page 16. The
setting is stored for the remote control currently
in use.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Language / Units".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
74
5. Select "Language".
6. Select "Text language".
The language for the display texts and navi-
gation messages can be changed.
7. Select the desired language.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. Note, however,
that you can change the basic setting while the
low beams are switched on. The setting is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Display settings".
5. Select "Brightness".
6. Select "Brightness".
7. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set-
ting is reached.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
75
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Technology for driving comfort
and safety
Park Distance
Control PDC*
The concept
PDC assists you with parking backwards. Acous-
tic signals and a visual indicator
warn you of the
presence of an object behind the vehicle. To
measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic
sensors in either bumper.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the rear corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/
1.50 m from the rear center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached slowly,
as is usually the case when parking. Avoid
approaching an object at high speed, otherwise
physical circumstances may lead to the system
warning being issued too late.<
Automatic mode
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated automatically after
approx. 1 second when you engage reverse gear
or move the automatic transmission selector
lever to position R. Wait this short period before
driving.
Acoustic signals
As the distance between vehicle and object
decreases, the intervals between the tones
become shorter. If the distance to the nearest
object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a
continuous tone sounds.
If the distance remains constant, e.g. when driv-
ing parallel to a wall, the acoustic signal stops
after approx. 3 seconds.
Malfunction
Indicator lamp comes on: PDC is mal-
functioning. A message appears on the
Control Display. Have the system
checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not direct the
jet toward the sensors for lengthy periods and
only spray from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
PDC with visual warning
To have the system show distances to objects on
the Control Display. The contours of distant
objects are shown on the Control Display even
before the acoustic signal sounds.
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
76
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "PDC" .
6. Select "PDC display on".
The PDC display is activated. It is shown on
the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control
in use.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for esti-
mating the distance between the vehicle
and any obstructions always remains with the
driver. Sensors, too, have blind spots in which
objects cannot be detected. Moreover, ultra-
sonic detection can reach its physical limits with
objects such as trailer tow bars and couplings,
thin and wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low
objects already indicated, such as curbs, may
enter the sensors' blind spots before or after a
continuous audible signal is given. Higher, pro-
truding objects, such as wall ledges, may not be
detectable. Therefore, always drive cautiously,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage. Loud sound sources outside
or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.<
Driving stability
control systems
Your MINI has a number of systems that help to
maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse
driving conditions.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with driving stability control systems.
An appropriate driving style always remains the
responsibility of the driver. Therefore do not
reduce the additional safety margin by engaging
in hazardous driving thereby running the risk of
an accident.<
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak-
ing. Safe steering response is maintained even
during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
Braking safely, refer to page 103.
Among others, ABS includes the following
functions:
> Cornering Brake Control CBC
> Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
> Brake Assist
Cornering Brake Control CBC
Driving stability and steering characteristics are
further enhanced while braking in turns or dur-
ing a lane change.
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake Assist
Rapidly depressing the brake causes this system
to automatically develop maximum braking
force. Thus, the system helps keep braking dis-
tance to a minimum. At the same time, all the
benefits provided by ABS are exploited.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
traction when you pull away from rest or accel-
erate. The system also recognizes unstable driv-
ing conditions, for example if the rear of the car
is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at
an angle past the front wheels. In these cases,
DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course
within physical limits by reducing engine output
and through braking actions at the individual
wheels.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
77
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
DSC also encompasses the following functions:
> Antilock Brake System ABS
> Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
> Brake Assist
> Cornering Brake Control CBC
> Hill Start Assist
Deactivating DSC
Press the button repeatedly until the DSC indica-
tor lamps come on. DSC is deactivated. Stabiliz-
ing and propulsion promoting actions are no
longer executed.
When driving with snow chains or to 'rock free'
in snow, it can be helpful to switch off DSC for a
brief period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again: the DSC indicator lamps
go out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes:
The DSC controls the driving and break-
ing forces.
If the indicator lamps are on:
DSC is deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC*
DTC is a type of DSC that is propulsion optimized
for special road conditions such as uncleared
snowy roads. The system ensures maximum
propulsion though with restricted driving stabil-
ity. You therefore need to drive with suitable
caution.
In the following exceptional situations, it can be
useful to briefly activate DTC:
> when driving on snow-covered inclines, in
slush, or on uncleared snowy roads
> when rocking the vehicle free, driving out of
deep snow or on loose surfaces
> when driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
Press the button: the DTC indicator lamps
come on.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DTC controls the driving and breaking
forces.
If the indicator lamps are on:
DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again: the DSC indicator lamps
go out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
78
Deactivating both DTC and DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds: the DSC
indicator lamps in the display elements come
on. The Dynamic Traction Control DTC and
Dynamic Stability Control DSC are both deacti-
vated. There will be no more stabilizing inter-
ventions.
Interventions (differential lock
*) in braking
occur to improve propulsion when drive wheels
are rotating unevenly, even when the DSC is
deactivated.
Activating DSC
Press the button again: the indicator lamps
go out.
Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist aids you in comfortably driving
off on inclines. It is not necessary to use the
parking brake for this.
1. Hold the MINI with the brake.
2. Release the brake and immediately
drive off.
Hill Start Assist holds the car in place for approx.
2 seconds after the brake is released.
Depending on the load and gradient, the
vehicle can roll backward slightly during
this period. After you release the brake, immedi-
ately start driving since the hill start assist only
holds the vehicle for about 2 seconds, and it will
start to roll backwards.<
Sport button*
Pressing the button causes your MINI to respond
even more sportily.
> Engine responds more spontaneously to
movements of the accelerator.
> Steering response is more direct.
With automatic transmission:
> More rapid gear shifting in Sport program.
Activating the system
Press the SPORT button.
The LED lights up.
SPORT is briefly displayed in the tachometer.
Deactivating the system
> Press the SPORT button again.
> Switch off the engine.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a
tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the
individual tires while moving.
If a tire loses pressure, its rolling circumference
changes, and this in turn alters the speed of
rotation. This change is detected and is reported
as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
Each time you correct the pressure in a
tire, or change a wheel or tire, the system
must be reinitialized.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
79
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
System limitations
The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn the driver
of sudden, severe tire damage caused by exter-
nal factors, nor can it identify the gradual loss of
pressure that will inevitably occur in all four tires
over a lengthy period of time.
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in
the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
When the vehicle is driven with a space-saver
spare tire
*, page 193, the Flat Tire Monitor can-
not function.
Initializing the system
The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically.
Do not initialize the system if you are driving
with snow chains or a space-saver spare tire
*.<
Using the button in the turn
indicator lever
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator
lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is dis-
played.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Briefly press the button repeatedly until the
corresponding symbol and "RESET" are dis-
played.
5. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
6. Start driving.
Initialization is completed while the car is on
the move, without any feedback.
Using the onboard monitor
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
80
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "FTM".
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset".
8. Select "Yes".
9. Start driving.
The initialization is completed during
driving.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. An acoustic signal also
sounds. There is a flat tire or substantial
loss of tire pressure.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Check whether your vehicle is equipped
with normal tires or Run-Flat Tires.
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires
is a circle with the letters RSC on the
sidewall, refer to Run-Flat Tires, page 173.<
Normal tires
1. Determine which tire is damaged.
If this cannot be determined, contact
your MINI Dealer.<
2. Repair the flat tire, refer to page 189, or
change the damaged tire, refer to page 192.
Run-Flat Tires*
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph
or 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and
steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed
of 50 mph or 80 km/h.
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is
not equipped with Run-Flat Tires,
page 173, otherwise a serious accident
could result.<
2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-
sure in all four tires.
If all four tires are inflated to the cor-
rect pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor
might not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guidelines:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons
without luggage:
approx. 94 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 persons, load compartment full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h, otherwise an
accident may occur. In the event of pressure
loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes
reduced tracking stability in braking, extended
braking distance and altered natural steering
characteristics.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during
the journey, this may be an indication that the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
81
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce the vehi-
cle speed and stop as soon as possible. Other-
wise, sections of the tire may come loose and
cause accidents. Do not continue driving and
contact your MINI Dealer.<
Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM*
The concept
TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four
mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is
a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be reset while all tire infla-
tion pressures are correct.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Other-
wise, the system may malfunction.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
System limitations
TPM cannot warn you in advance of sud-
den severe tire damage caused by outside
influences.<
The system does not work correctly if it has not
been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indi-
cated even though the tire inflation pressures
are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire if a wheel without TPM electronics, such as a
compact spare wheel
*, has been mounted, or if
TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other
systems or devices using the same radio fre-
quency.
Status indicator on the onboard monitor
The tire and system condition is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes into account the fact that tire pres-
sure changes while the vehicle is being driven.
The tire pressure does not need to be corrected
unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means
of color indicators.
Green
The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the
established target value.
"TPM active" is displayed on the onboard
monitor.
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in the indicated tire. A message appears on
the onboard monitor.
All wheels yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in several tires. A message appears on the
onboard monitor.
Gray
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Possible reasons for this:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary malfunction caused by systems
or devices using the same radio frequency
> Malfunction
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
82
Using the button in the turn
indicator lever
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator
lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is dis-
played.
3. Press and hold the button until the display
changes.
4. Repeatedly press the button briefly until the
symbol for Tire Pressure Monitor and
"ACTIVE" are displayed.
The Tire Pressure Monitor can be reset using
"RESET".
5. Press and hold the button until "RESETTING"
appears.
6. Start driving.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the tar-
get values to be monitored. The system
reset is completed during your drive, and
can be interrupted at any time. When driving
resumes, the reset is continued automati-
cally. The indicator lamp goes out after the
system reset is completed.
Using the onboard monitor
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings" and press the MINI joystick.
4. Select "Vehicle and tires" and press the MINI
joystick.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "TPM" and press
the MINI joystick.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
83
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
8. Select "Yes" and press the MINI joystick.
9. Start driving.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The system reset is
completed during your drive, and can be inter-
rupted at any time. When driving resumes, the
reset is continued automatically. On the
onboard monitor, the tires are shown in green
and "Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
being reset and while it is determining the
inflation pressures, all tires on the onboard mon-
itor are displayed in yellow. The message "Tire
low!" is shown.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
onboard monitor. An acoustic signal
also sounds. There is a flat tire or sub-
stantial loss of tire pressure.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Check whether your vehicle is equipped
with normal tires or Run-Flat Tires.
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires
is a circle with the letters RSC on the
sidewall, page 173.<
Normal tires
1. Determine which tire is damaged.
If this cannot be determined, contact
your MINI Dealer.<
2. Repair the flat tire or change the damaged
tire, refer to page 192.
Run-Flat Tires*
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is
not equipped with Run-Flat Tires, oth-
erwise a serious accident could result.<
2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guidelines:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons
without luggage:
approx. 94 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 persons, load compartment full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h, otherwise an
accident may occur. In the event of pressure
loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes
reduced tracking stability in braking, extended
braking distance and altered natural steering
characteristics.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during
the journey, this may be an indication that the
damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce the vehi-
cle speed and stop as soon as possible. Other-
wise, sections of the tire may come loose and
cause accidents. Do not continue driving and
contact your MINI Dealer.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
84
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in yel-
low and then lights up continuously;
the larger warning lamp comes on in
yellow.
On the onboard monitor, the tires are shown in
gray and a message appears. No punctures can
be detected.
This type of message is shown in the following
situations:
> If there is a malfunction.
Have the system checked.
> If a wheel without TPM electronics has been
mounted.
> If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to
other systems or devices using the same ra-
dio frequency.
Message for unsuccessful system reset
Both warning lamps come on in yellow.
A message appears on the onboard
monitor. The system is not reset after a
tire has been changed, for example.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, page 81.
Declaration according to
NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure
Monitoring Systems
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehi-
cle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pres-
sure for those tires. As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres-
sure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires are significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not reached
the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure tell-
tale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
85
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
MINI:
1 Front airbags
2 Side airbags in backrests
3 Head airbags at the front and rear
MINI Convertible:
1 Front airbags
2 Side/head airbags in the backrests
Protective effect
Observe the instructions on page 42 to
ensure the best possible personal protec-
tion.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head
and side airbags help provide protection in the
event of side impact. The relevant side airbag
supports the side upper body area. The head air
bag supports the head.
The side/head airbag in the MINI Convertible
protects the head during impact.
The airbags are designed to not be triggered in
every type of collision, e.g. not in minor acci-
dents, certain rollover situations or rear impacts.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the dashboard and window on the passen-
ger side free from obstruction, i.e. do not cover it
with adhesive film or coverings, and do not affix
any holders such as for a navigation device or a
mobile phone.
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
objects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do
not modify the individual components of the
system or its wiring in any way. This includes the
upholstered covers on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as
the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to
remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components imme-
diately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a MINI Dealer
or a workshop that works according to repair
procedures of the manufacturer of your MINI
with correspondingly trained personnel and has
the required explosives licenses. Otherwise,
unprofessional attempts to service the system
could lead to failure in an emergency or undes-
ired airbag activation, either of which could
result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the air-
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
86
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front pas-
senger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side air-
bags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior rear-
view mirror shows the current status of
the front passenger airbags, deactivated or acti-
vated, refer to Status of front passenger airbags
below.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Transport-
ing children safely, page 48.
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in certain
positions; the indicator lamp for the front pas-
senger airbags comes on. In such cases, the pas-
senger should change his or her sitting position
so that the front passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired
airbag status cannot be achieved by changing
the sitting position, transport the relevant pas-
senger on a rear seat. Do not attach covers,
cushions, ball mats or other items to the front
passenger seat unless they are specifically rec-
ommended by the manufacturer of your MINI.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Other-
wise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not
ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
MINI:
MINI Convertible:
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags shows the functional status of the front
passenger's front and side airbags in accordance
with whether and how the front passenger seat
is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether
the front passenger airbags are activated or
deactivated.
> The indicator lamp comes on as intended
when a child in a specially designated child-
restraint system is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system. This particularly applies to
child seats that were required by the NHTSA
at the time of manufacture of the vehicle.
After installing a child's seat, check that the
indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags comes on. It indicates that the child's
seat has been detected and that the front
passenger airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on as long
as a person of sufficient size and in a correct
sitting position is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
87
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, page 51, the warning
lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire
airbag system and the belt tensioners are oper-
ational.
Airbag system malfunction
> The warning lamp does not come on
when radio readiness or the ignition is
switched on.
> The warning lamp stays lit continuously.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay, otherwise
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident
occurs.<
MINI Convertible:
Rollover protection
system
The rollover system is automatically activated
during an accident or dangerous driving situa-
tion, during extreme tilt of the longitudinal axis,
or during loss of ground contact. The roll bar
located behind the rear seat headrest is pro-
jected within a fraction of a second.
In addition to the reinforced windshield frame,
the rollover protection system ensures the nec-
essary head clearance for all occupants of the
vehicle.
Never block the travel path of the rollover
protection system with any objects.
Always wear your safety belt, it protects you in
a minor car accident and, depending on the
severity of the accident, the seat belt tensioner
and the multilevel airbag system will protect
you.<
Lowering
If the rollover protection system releases acci-
dentally, have your MINI Service check it.
If the rollover protective system is
extended, do not operate the convert-
ible top.
Never attempt to modify the individual compo-
nents or the electrical wiring of the rollover pro-
tective system.
Have the necessary work on the rollover protec-
tion system of your MINI only carried out by an
authorized MINI Dealer.
Faulty repair may lead to the failure of the sys-
tem or malfunctions.
Check the system regularly and in order to
ensure a long service life of all functions, it is
mandatory to maintain the service intervals,
refer to page 65.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Lamps
88
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off and daytime running lamps
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control
*, daytime run-
ning lamps and welcome lamps
When you open the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch
position 1.
Parking lamps
Turn the light switch to position 1.
The front, rear and side vehicle lighting is
switched on.
Activation of lights on one side of the vehicle for
parking, page 89.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Low beams
Turn the light switch to position 2.
The low beams come on when the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation.
The headlamps may also come on when the sun
is sitting low on a blue sky.
When driving into tunnels with bright overhead
lights, there may be a delay before the head-
lamps come on.
The low beams remain switched on indepen-
dent of the ambient lighting conditions when
you switch on the fog lamps
*.
If the daytime running lamps are activated,
page 89, the low beams are always switched on
with the light switch in position 3 and the igni-
tion on. The exterior lamps are automatically
switched off after the vehicle is parked.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should respond to these kinds
of low-visibility situations by switching the head-
lamps on manually.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in the low beam or
automatic headlamp control position when you
switch off the ignition, the parking lamps and
interior lamps come on for a certain time as soon
as the vehicle is unlocked.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after
switching off the ignition with the lamps
switched off, the low beams come on and
remain on for a certain time.
The setting is stored for the remote control in
use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
89
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Setting the duration or deactivating
the function
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
5. Select "Lighting".
6. Select "Pathway lighting".
7. Turn the MINI joystick to select the corre-
sponding duration.
8. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.
Daytime running lamps*
The light switch can remain in the lamps off,
parking lamps or automatic headlamp control
*
position.
In the lamps off position, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off after the vehicle is
parked. In the parking lamps position, the park-
ing lamps will stay on after the ignition is
switched off.
Switch on the parking lamps separately if
needed.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps
The setting is stored for the remote control in
use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
5. Select "Lighting".
6. Select "Daytime running lamps".
The daytime running lamps are switched on.
High beams/roadside
parking lamps
1 Turn signal indicators/roadside parking
lamps
*
2 Switching on high beams
3 Switching off high beams/headlamp flasher
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side for
parking. Comply with local regulations when
doing so.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down, arrow 1.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Lamps
90
Switching off
Press the lever up or down to the pressure point.
Fog lamps*
1 Fog lamps*
2 Rear fog lamp*
Press the respective switch to turn the lamps
on/off.
MINI Convertible
> Turn on fog lamps:
Press the button upwards.
> Turn on rear fog lamp:
Press the button downwards.
When turning the lamps off, push the respective
button again upwards or downwards.
Fog lamps*
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The
green indicator lamp comes on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fog
lamps are switched off when you activate the
headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Rear fog lamp*
The low beams or parking lamps with fog lamps
must be switched on. The yellow indicator lamp
comes on when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are on.
Increasing brightness
Press and hold the button until the desired
brightness is reached.
Reducing brightness
Press the button briefly.
The brightness decreases every time the button
is pressed briefly.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, the footwell lamps* and the
cargo bay lamp are controlled automatically.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps
inside the car are switched off about
8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer
to Start/stop button on page 51.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
91
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Switching interior lamps on/off manually
To switch the interior lamps on/off.
Press the switch.
To switch off the interior lamps permanently,
press the button for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps*
To switch the reading lamps on and off.
Press the switch.
Ambient lighting*
The color of the ambient lighting can be
changed.
> Press the switch forward.
The color changes in stages, ultimately to
orange.
> Press the switch toward the rear.
The color changes in stages, ultimately
to blue.
Intermediate settings and colors are possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Climate
92
Climate
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
Draft-free ventilation 94
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air flow rate, manual
5 Recirculated-air mode
6 AUTO program
7 Maximum cooling
8 Air distribution, manual
9 Setting the temperature
10 Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
11 Manual cooling function
12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield heating
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
93
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Automatic climate
control
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 6 offers the ideal air distribution
and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer
to AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfort-
able for you.
The following sections inform you in detail about
how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile set-
tings on page 26.
Air flow rate, manual
Press the – button to reduce air flow. Press
the + button to increase it.
You can reactivate the automatic mode
for the air flow rate with the AUTO button.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off
entirely to save on battery power. The display
remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
Reduce the air flow by pressing the – button
repeatedly until the system is switched off. All
indicators go out.
Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic
climate control back on.
AUTO program
The AUTO program adjusts the air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, towards the upper body area and
into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and
your temperature specifications will be adapted
to outside influences in accordance with sea-
sonal changes, e.g. sunlight.
The cooling function is automatically switched
on along with the AUTO program.
Convertible Program
If the soft top is open, the Convertible Program is
activated. During the Convertible Program, the
automatic climate control is optimized for driv-
ing with the soft top down. Furthermore, with
increasing vehicle speed, the airflow is also
increased.
If attaching the wind reflector, the perfor-
mance of the Convertible Program can be
significantly improved.<
Recirculated-air mode
Recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air is permanently shut
off. The system then recirculates
the air currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces, press the AUTO
button or switch off the recirculated-air mode
and, if necessary, increase the air flow rate.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over an extended period of time, otherwise the
air quality inside the car will deteriorate contin-
uously.<
Maximum cooling
At outside temperatures above
32 7/0 6 and when the engine is
running, you obtain a maximum
cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic climate control goes into recircu-
lated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air
flows at maximum rate from the vents for the
upper body area. You should therefore open
them for maximum cooling.
Air distribution, manual
The flow of air is directed to the
windows, to the upper body area or
to the footwell as selected.
You can switch the automatic
air distribution back on by pressing the AUTO
button.
Temperature
Set the desired temperature individually.
The automatic climate control achieves
this temperature as quickly as possible
regardless of the season, using maximum
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Climate
94
cooling or heating power if necessary, and then
maintains it.
If you switch between different tempera-
ture settings in quick succession, the auto-
matic climate control does not have enough
time to achieve the set temperature.<
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's equip-
ment, the upper wires serve as an
antenna and are not part of the rear window
defroster.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly removes ice and condensa-
tion from the windshield and front
side windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the
cooling function.
The windshield heating
* is switched on auto-
matically.
Windshield heating*
The windshield heating is switched
off automatically after a certain
time.
Cooling function
When the cooling function is on,
the air is cooled, dried, then
reheated according to the temper-
ature setting. This function is only
available while the engine is running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started. The
recirculated-air mode may be switched on auto-
matically.
The cooling function is automatically switched
on along with the AUTO program. The passenger
compartment can only be cooled while the
engine is running.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The
activated-charcoal filter provides additional pro-
tection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the
outside air. Your MINI Dealer replaces this com-
bined filter as a standard part of your scheduled
maintenance.
You can call up further information in the service
requirements display, page 65.
Ventilation
1 Knob for continuous opening and closing
2 Jet for direction of air flow
Opening/closing
Turn the knob.
Direction of air flow
Swivel the entire jet.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
95
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal
remote control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmitters
for various remote-controlled devices, such as
garage and gate openers and lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control regis-
ters and stores signals from the original hand-
held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. The system in question can then
be operated by means of the programmed
memory button 1. The LED 2 flashes to confirm
transmission of the signal.
If you decide to sell your vehicle one day, in the
interest of your own security, remember to clear
the stored programs before the vehicle leaves
your possession, page 96.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no
people, animals or objects are within the pivot-
ing or travel range of the device being operated.
Comply also with the safety instructions supplied
with the original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device will
be compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
For additional information, please contact your
MINI Dealer or call: 1-800-355-3515.
You can also obtain information on the Internet
at:
www.MINI.com or
www.homelink.com
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition, page 51.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
press both outer memory buttons 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. All stored programs are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 2 to 12 in/5 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-
onds, alter the distance.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
96
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the system with the engine
running or with the ignition switched on.
If the system fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote con-
trol. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly and then remains
lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held
transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If it
uses an alternating-code system, program the
memory buttons 1 as described under Alternat-
ing-code hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the device to be set. You will find information
there on the possibilities for synchronization or
programming of additional hand-held transmit-
ters.
When programming hand-held transmitters that
employ an alternating code, please observe the
following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the re-
mote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of
the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
Clearing stored programs
Press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx.
20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes: All stored
programs are cleared.
It is not possible to clear individual programs.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 2 to 12 in/5 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of
the respective original hand-held transmit-
ter used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit key of the
original hand-held transmitter and release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly.
If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after
approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and
repeat this step.
Glove compartment
Opening
Press the button to open the cover.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
97
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Closing
Fold cover up.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent, close the glove compartment after
use while the vehicle is being driven.<
MINI Convertible: Locking
Use the integrated key to lock the remote con-
trol system, refer to page 26.
Ventilation*
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, it may
be possible to ventilate the glove compartment.
Opening
Rotate the switch in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
Rotate the switch in the opposite direction of the
arrow until it is in the vertical position.
Depending on the temperature setting of the air
conditioning or the automatic climate control,
high temperatures may result in the glove com-
partment.
Center armrest*
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats con-
tains either a compartment or the cover for the
mobile phone base plate
* or the snap-in
adapter
*.
Opening
The cover slides along guide rails and can be
opened fully by pushing it back and lifting it.
Closing
Push the cover forwards.
Connection for external
audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio recordings
over the vehicle loudspeakers.
> AUX-In port, refer to page 155
> USB-audio interface
*, refer to page 156
Storage compartments
In the vehicle interior
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
will find storage compartments in the doors,
next to the rear seats and in the center console
*.
The map compartments in the MINI Convertible
are located next to the rear seats.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
98
Nets* are located in the passenger footwell and
on the backs of the front seat backrests.
Storage compartment on the front
passenger side*
Opening
Briefly press the bottom edge of the cover.
Closing
Push the cover back into its original position.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent, close the storage compartment after
use while the vehicle is being driven.<
MINI Convertible
The storage compartment cannot be locked.
Clothes hooks
There are clothes hooks on the grab handles in
the rear passenger compartment.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not
hang heavy objects from the hooks, otherwise
they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in
case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
Cup holders and
ashtray*
Cup holders
Two cup holders are located in the front of the
center console, another is in the rear at the back
of the center console.
Do not place glass containers in the cup
holders, as this increases the risk of injury
in the event of an accident.<
Ashtray*
The ashtray is located in one of the cup holders
in the center console.
Emptying
Remove the entire ashtray.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the key so
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
99
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
that children cannot operate the cigarette
lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your MINI, you can use electrical devices such
as a flashlight, car vacuum cleaner, etc., up to
approx. 200 watts at 12 volts, as long as one of
the following sockets is available. Avoid damag-
ing the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of
unsuitable shape or size.
Cigarette lighter socket
Remove the lighter* or cover from the socket.
Power socket in cargo bay
MINI
Pull out the cover.
MINI Convertible
Pull out the cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
102
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed the following:
> Gasoline engine
4,500 rpm or 100 mph/160 km/h
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Close the tailgate
Drive the vehicle only when the tailgate is
closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could
penetrate the interior of the vehicle.<
If special circumstances make it absolutely nec-
essary to drive with the tailgate open:
1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
2. Switch off the recirculated-air mode and sig-
nificantly increase the air flow rate of the
automatic climate control, page 93.
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys-
tem, and never apply undercoating to them.
When driving, standing at idle and while park-
ing, take care to avoid possible contact between
the hot exhaust system and any highly flamma-
ble materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such
contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of seri-
ous personal injuries and property damage. Do
not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise
there is a risk of burns.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning, can
cause partial or complete loss of tire contact
with the road surface, so that the car cannot be
steered or braked properly.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
103
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining
tread depth on the tires, refer also to Tread
depth on page 172.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with
the clutch; use the parking brake. Other-
wise greater clutch wear will result.<
For information on driving off using Hill Start
Assist*, refer to page 78.
Braking safely
Your MINI is equipped with ABS. If you are in a
situation which requires full braking, it is best to
brake using maximum brake pressure. Since the
vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you
can still avoid possible obstacles with a mini-
mum of steering effort.
The pulsation of the brake pedal, together with
the sound of hydraulic regulation, indicates that
ABS is actively taking effect.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure
that this maneuver does not endanger other
road users. The heat generated in this process
helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that
Then full braking force will be immediately avail-
able when it is needed.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Downshift-
ing in manual mode of the automatic transmis-
sion, page 54.
Never drive with the clutch held down,
with the transmission in neutral or with
the engine switched off; otherwise, engine brak-
ing action will not be present or there will be no
power assistance to the brakes or steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals, otherwise pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail
to cure.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic climate
control is in operation, and then exits under the
vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are therefore normal.
In the MINI Cooper S, the coolant pump may
continue to run for some time after the engine is
switched off. This will generate noise in the
engine compartment.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
104
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can
assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<
Avoid fluid spills in the cargo bay as they
could damage the vehicle.<
MINI: Cargo bay
Cargo bay cover
Do not place any objects on the cover,
otherwise they could endanger the car's
occupants, e.g. in the case of braking or sudden
swerving, or they may damage the cover.<
When you open the tailgate, the cargo bay cover
is raised.
To load bulky luggage, the cover can be
removed.
1. Unhook the lift straps from the tailgate.
2. Pull the cover out of the holders toward
the rear.
Expanding the cargo bay
The rear set backrest is split. Both sides can be
folded separately to expand the cargo bay.
1. Pull the lever.
2. Fold rear seat backrests forward.
When folding the backrest back up, make
sure that the seat's locking mechanisms
engage properly. Otherwise, cargo could be
thrown around in the event of sharp braking or
swerving and endanger the occupants.<
Adjusting rear seat backrest*
Expand the cargo bay by raising the split rear
seat backrests to a steeper angle.
1. Pull the lever, arrow 1, and fold the rear seat
backrest forward.
2. Fold up the lever of the backrest lock until it
audibly engages, arrow 2.
3. Fold back the backrest until it engages.
If the rear seat backrests are positioned at
a steeper angle, do not install child-
restraint systems in the rear of the vehicle as
their protective features may be ineffective.<
MINI Convertible: Luggage
compartment
Do not place any objects on the luggage
compartment roll-up cover, as this may
damage the cover or the convertible top.<
Loading aid
When the convertible top is closed, you can load
the vehicle more easily by releasing the convert-
ible top and folding it up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
105
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
1. Release the convertible top using the han-
dles, see arrows 1.
2. Lift the convertible top, see arrow 2.
3. Fold back the handles and place them on
holders 3.
Expanding the luggage compartment
volume
You can enlarge the luggage compartment vol-
ume when the convertible top is closed.
1. Fold the convertible top upwards, refer to
Loading aid
2. Pull the luggage compartment's roll-up
cover from its lower storage area and
towards the rear, then swing upward, see
arrows 1.
3. Push cover into the upper storage areas, see
arrows 2 and place down horizontally.
To operate the convertible top, move the
luggage compartment cover back to its
lower position.<
Through-loading system
To be able to transport larger objects, the rear
backrest can be folded down.
1. If necessary, use the integrated key and
open the backrest lock 1.
2. Press button 2 and fold down backrest
together with the belt strap.
3. Fold the backrest forward.
When folding the backrest back into its
original position, always ensure that the
catch engages securely. A loose backrest might
fail to prevent cargo from entering the passen-
ger compartment during sudden braking or eva-
sive maneuvers, posing a potential hazard to
occupants.
The belt guide loop, see page 45, must be
closed.<
Determining cargo limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve-
hicle's placard
*:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading
can result in damage to the vehicle and
unstable driving conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
106
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be four 150 lbs. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the sum of the occu-
pants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The
greater the weight of the occupants, the less
cargo/luggage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the
rear seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
respective opposite buckle.
> Do not stack higher than the top edge of the
backrests.
MINI
MINI Convertible
Securing cargo
> Secure smaller and lighter items using re-
taining or draw straps
*.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
* for securing larger
and heavier objects are available at your
MINI Dealer. Four lashing eyes are provided
for attaching the cargo straps. Two of them
are located on the forward wall of the
cargo bay.
Comply with the information enclosed with
the load-securing devices.
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
107
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerves are necessary.
Do not exceed the approved gross weight and
axle loads, page 205; otherwise the vehicle's
operating safety is no longer assured and the
vehicle will not be in compliance with the certifi-
cation regulations.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-
pants. Do not secure cargo using the fastening
points for the tether strap, page 49; they may
become damaged.<
MINI: Roof-mounted
luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option for
your MINI. Your MINI Dealer will be glad to
advise you. Comply with the installation instruc-
tions supplied with the rack system.
Mounting points
Remove the cover panel.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect
on vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 205.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom.
When loading, make sure that there is sufficient
space for the movement of the glass sunroof
and that no objects protrude into the swiveling
area of the tailgate; otherwise damage can
occur.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers, and take corners gently.
Rear luggage rack*
A specially designed rear luggage rack is avail-
able for your MINI/MINI Convertible as optional
accessory. Please read the in information pro-
vided in the assembly instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points can be found under the
covers inside the bumper.
Push out the covers from the respective
recesses.
Loading the rear luggage rack
When loading the rack, please ensure not to
exceed the permissible roof load, the permissi-
ble gross vehicle weight, and the axle weight.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 205.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
108
Saving fuel
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif-
ferent factors. The implementation of certain
measures, your driving style and regular mainte-
nance can have an influence on fuel consump-
tion and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts no longer in use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof- or rear-mounted
luggage racks whenever you are not using
them.
Attached parts on the vehicle affect its aerody-
namics and increase fuel consumption.
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start-
ing on a long trip.
Low inflation pressure increases rolling resis-
tance and thus leads to greater fuel consump-
tion and tire wear.
Drive off immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the
fastest way for the cold engine to reach its oper-
ating temperature.
Think ahead while driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking by
maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead.
Driving smoothly and anticipating impending
traffic situations reduces fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
Use first gear only for driving off. In second and
higher gears, accelerate smoothly to a suitable
engine and road speed. In doing so, avoid high
engine speeds and shift up early.
When you reach your desired traveling speed,
shift to the highest suitable gear and drive at
constant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red traffic light, take your
foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast
to a halt in the highest suitable gear.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
accelerator and let the vehicle coast in a suit-
able gear.
Fuel supply is shut off automatically when the
vehicle is coasting.
Switch off the engine during
lengthy stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or
in traffic congestions.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
good economy and a long vehicle life. The man-
ufacturer of your MINI recommends having the
vehicle serviced by a MINI Dealer. Also note the
MINI Maintenance System, page 179.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Starting the navigation system
112
Starting the navigation system
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.
Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special naviga-
tion DVD. You can obtain the latest version from
your MINI Dealer.
Inserting navigation DVD
Use the lower drive for the navigation DVD.
1. Press the button, arrow, and remove the
cover.
2. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up.
3. To replace the cover, first insert it on the left
and then press forward on the right until it
snaps in.
4. Wait for several seconds to allow the con-
tents of the DVD to be read in.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press the button.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected, the drive may be
blocked. In this case, a message will appear on
the Control Display.
Displaying arrow view in map display
When destination guidance is active, the arrow
view can be displayed additionally on the right
side of the map display.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Turn the MINI joystick until "Language /
Units" is selected and press the
MINI joystick.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the MINI joystick
until "Languages" is selected and press the
MINI joystick.
6. Select "Display arrow view" and press the
MINI joystick.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
114
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering a destination by voice commands*,
page 117
> Selecting destination using information,
page 120
> Selecting destination from a list, Destination
list, page 121
> Selecting destination from address book,
page 122
> Storing home address, page 123
After selecting your destination you can proceed
to start the destination guidance, page 126.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. If you do not observe this precau-
tion, you may be in violation of the law, and can
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Opening navigation
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Naviga-
tion" and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Navigation".
The following information is displayed on the
onboard monitor:
> During destination guidance: the arrow or
map view
> When destination guidance is switch off: the
destination list
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier to enter the names of streets or towns,
page 125. This allows you to enter different
spellings and completes your entry automati-
cally so that stored names can be called up
quickly.
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field.
2. Select "Navigation".
"New destination" is highlighted.
3. Press the MINI joystick.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
115
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
4. Select "Enter address".
The system also supports you with the following
features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town
or city.
> You can skip the entry of country and local-
ity if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
Selecting country
1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed
country.
The list of available countries appears on the
display.
2. Select the country of destination.
At least the town/city of the destination or its zip
code must be entered in order to start the desti-
nation guidance.
Entering destination by town/city name
1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed
town/city.
2. Select the first letter.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
ter appears on the Control Display.
3. Delete letters if necessary:
> To delete individual letters:
Move the MINI joystick to the right to
highlight and press the MINI joystick.
> To delete all letters:
Move the MINI joystick to the right to
highlight and press the MINI joystick
for an extended period.
4. If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
> To enter spaces, if necessary:
Select the symbol.
5. If necessary, change to the list of towns and
cities and select a name.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
116
Entering destination by zip code
1. Select "Town / City".
2. Enter the zip code:
Select the digits individually.
> To enter spaces, if necessary:
Select the symbol.
3. Delete digits if necessary:
> To delete digits individually:
Move the MINI joystick to the right to
highlight and press the MINI joystick.
> To delete all digits:
Move the MINI joystick to the right to
highlight and press the MINI joystick
for an extended period.
4. Select the zip code.
The corresponding destination is displayed.
5. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Select the town/city.
Entering street, house number
and intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered in the same manner as
the town or city.
The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.
Entering a street without entering
a town/city
You can also enter a street without specifying a
town/city. In this case, all streets in the desig-
nated country are offered. The corresponding
town/city is displayed after the street name.
1. Turn the MINI joystick until "State / Prov-
ince" or the displayed country is selected.
The list of available countries appears on the
display.
2. Select the country of destination.
3. Turn the MINI joystick until "Street" is
selected.
4. Select the first letter.
A list of all streets starting with this letter and
of the associated towns/cities appears on
the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
117
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
5. If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
6. Change to the list of street names and
select the street name in the corresponding
town/city.
Entering a house number
You can enter all house numbers that are stored
for the street on the navigation DVD.
1. Select "House number".
2. To enter the house number:
Select the digits individually.
3. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Select the house number.
You can only enter house numbers that are
stored for the street on the navigation DVD.
Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry
> Select "Start guidance".
Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If you do not want to start destination guid-
ance right away:
Select "Add to destination list".
The destination is stored in the destination
list, page 121.
Entering a destination by
voice commands*
You can enter a desired destination via the voice
activation system. During the destination input,
you can switch between voice entry and entry
via the onboard monitor at any time. To do
so, reactivate the voice activation system if
necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud via {Options}.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Selecting country
1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
Say the name of the destination country in the
language of the voice activation system.
Entering destination
The destination can be spelled or entered as an
entire word.
Spelling the destination
To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is
commonly spelled in the destination country.
Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphases and
pauses.
2. {Enter address}
2. Say the name of the destination country.
1. To spell the name of a town/city:
Say at least the first three letters of the
town/city. The more letters you say, the
more accurately the system will recog-
nize the town/city.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
118
The system can suggest up to 20 destina-
tions that meet your entries.
Up to 6 entries at a time appear on the Con-
trol Display.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via the onboard monitor:
Turn the MINI joystick until the town/city is
selected.
Entering the destination as an
entire word
Towns/cities and streets located in the region
where the language of the voice activation sys-
tem is spoken can be entered as an entire word.
Example: to enter a U.S. destination as an entire
word, the system language must be English.
A prerequisite is the use of a suitable naviga-
tion DVD.
Pronounce the words smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphases and
pauses.
1. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city
of destination.
The system can suggest up to 6 destinations
that meet your entry.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via the onboard monitor:
Turn the MINI joystick until the town/city is
selected.
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be distinguished by the system are
compiled in a separate list and shown as a desti-
nation followed by three dots.
If applicable, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city from that list.<
Entering street and house number
The street is entered in the same way as the des-
tination town/city.
To enter the house number:
House numbers of up to 4 digits can be entered.
Say the house numbers as individual digits.
The system suggests a location.
2. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/
city: {Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To show other entries in the list:
{Next page}
> To respell the town/city: {Repeat}
2. Say the name of the destination
town/city.
The system suggests a location.
3. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/
city: {Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To re-enter the town/city: {Repeat}
> To enter the town/city by spelling:
{Spell}
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
119
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Storing destinations
Destinations are added to the destination list or
can be stored in the address book.
Map-guided destination
selection
If you only know the location of the town or
street of destination, you can enter the destina-
tion using a map. Select the destination on the
map using cross-hairs and then transfer it for
destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation".
"New destination" is highlighted.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Input map".
A section of a map is displayed on the Con-
trol Display:
> During destination guidance, around the
current destination
> With the destination guidance deacti-
vated, around the last destination
entered
4. Select the destination using the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the
MINI joystick.
> To move the map: move the
MINI joystick in the corresponding
direction.
The MINI joystick can be moved to the
left, right, forward and backward.
5. Transfer the destination for destination
guidance or store it: press the MINI joystick.
The selected destination and other menu
items are displayed.
{Start guidance}
{Add to destination} or
{Add to address book}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
120
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places your cur-
rent position at the center of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination at the center of
the map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
> Exit the menu.
The map for destination entry can also be called
up in the map display:
Select the symbol.
Selecting destination
using information
To have selected destinations, e.g. hotels, sights
or hospitals, displayed, called up and transferred
for destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation".
"New destination" is highlighted.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Information".
4. Select location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
5. Press the MINI joystick.
6. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-
taurants", and press the MINI joystick.
7. If necessary, enter any search criteria, e.g.
the maximum distance from your current
location.
8. Select "<Start search>" and press the MINI
joystick.
Destinations are shown on the Control
Display.
9. Select a destination and press the MINI
joystick.
The scope of information and symbols
depends on the particular naviga-
tion DVD.<
10. Select a menu item:
> To transfer the address to the destination
list and start destination guidance:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
121
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Select the symbol and press the MINI
joystick.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select the symbol and press the MINI
joystick.
> To display additional destinations:
Select the symbol and press the MINI
joystick.
> To start a new search:
Select the symbol and press the MINI
joystick.
Exiting the menu
Select the arrow.
Symbols in map view
If you select the hotel category, for example,
hotels appear on the map as symbols.
To hide the symbols in map view:
1. Select the symbol and press the MINI
joystick.
2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the MINI
joystick.
The symbols are hidden.
To show the symbols:
Select "Show map icons" and press the MINI
joystick.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow.
Destination list
The last 20 destinations entered into the system
are shown in the destination list. These destina-
tions can be called up and transferred for desti-
nation guidance.
Planning a longer route: all destinations that you
wish to drive to can be stored in advance in the
destination list, refer to Entering a destination
manually on page 114.
Select "Navigation".
The destination last entered is listed first in the
destination list.
This symbol indicates the current desti-
nation.
To show other destinations in the destina-
tion list:
turn the MINI joystick.
Transferring destination for destination
guidance
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list.
2. Select "Start guidance".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
122
Editing destination list
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> To store the entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> To display information on the destina-
tion:
Select "Information on destination".
> To delete the entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> To delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". The destination guid-
ance is switched off.
> To change an entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination by town/city name,
page 115.
Address book
Opening address book
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
Select "Address book".
Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
1. Select "Address book".
2. Select "New address".
3. Select "Enter address".
4. Enter the name and address, refer to Enter-
ing a destination manually, page 114.
5. Select "Store in address book".
The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the desti-
nation list in the address book, page 121.
Storing current position*
The current position can be transferred to the
address book.
1. Select "Address book".
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the MINI joystick until
"New address" is selected.
3. Select "Use current location as address".
The name given can be changed. For opera-
tion, refer to Entering a destination manu-
ally, page 114.
4. Select "Store in address book".
You can also enter your current position into the
address book if you have left the area covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
123
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Selecting destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book".
The stored entries appear on the Control
Display.
2. Select an entry.
Starting destination guidance
Select "Start guidance".
Changing destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book".
2. Select an entry.
3. Select "Edit address".
4. Change entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destination
manually, page 114.
5. Select "Store in address book".
Deleting individual destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book".
2. Select an entry.
3. Select "Delete address".
4. Select "Yes".
Deleting all destinations from
address book
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires".
5. Select "Delete data".
6. Select "Delete address book".
7. Select "Yes".
Home address
You can store your current position or the cur-
rent destination as the home address in the
address book. This entry occupies the second
position in the address book.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
124
Storing home address
1. Select "Address book".
2. Select "Home address".
3. Select "Use current location as address" or
select "Save current destination" during
destination guidance.
Using home address as destination
1. Select "Home address".
2. Select "Start guidance".
Changing the home address
1. Select "Home address".
2. Select "Edit address".
For operation, refer to Entering a destination
manually, page 114.
Route selection
You can influence the calculated route by choos-
ing certain route criteria. You can change the
route criteria as often as you like during destina-
tion entry or during destination guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. The
road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As
a result, the routes recommended by the navi-
gation system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal expe-
rience.
Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation".
2. Select "Route preference".
The various criteria are listed on the Control
Display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways"
Highways and major traffic arteries are
given priority.
> "Avoid highways"
Highways are avoided as far as possible.
> "Fast route"
Fast route, being a combination of the
shortest possible route and the fastest
roads.
> "Short route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or
slow progress will be.
The route criterion is selected.
4. Select any additional criteria for the route, if
necessary:
> "Dynamic route"
Automatic rerouting due to traffic
obstructions. Depending on road type
and the kind and extent of the traffic
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
125
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
obstruction, the guided route may lead
through the traffic obstruction.
> "Avoid tollroads"
Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided as far as possible.
The route criterion is selected.
The route criteria can also be changed in the
arrow or map view:
Select the corresponding
symbol.
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid tollroads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take consider-
ably longer.<
Exiting the menu
Select the arrow.
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier to enter the names of towns or streets.
The system runs ongoing checks, comparing
your destination entries with the data stored on
the navigation DVD as the basis for instant
response. The benefits for you include:
> Names of towns entered may differ from the
official versions if you are using a spelling
that is customary in another country.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "München"
you can also enter the English spelling
"Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters
are available to ensure unambiguous identi-
fication.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored on
the navigation DVD. Thus, entry of errone-
ous or unregistered names is impossible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
126
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "Navigation".
2. Select the destination from the destination
list or enter a new destination, page 114.
3. Select "Start guidance".
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map on the
Control Display.
The destination guidance can also be started in
the arrow or map view:
Select the symbol.
At any time during destination guidance, you
can operate other equipment items via the
onboard monitor. You will be notified in time of
any necessary change of direction by means of
spoken instructions and the display of the direc-
tion arrows.
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance
In the arrow or map view
Select the symbol.
In the destination list
This symbol indicates the current dest-
ination.
1. Select the current destination.
2. Select "Stop guidance".
If you did not reach the destination before the
end of the last journey, the following question
will appear in the display at the start of the next
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
127
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
journey:
"Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.
Starting destination guidance
immediately
Select "Yes".
Route display
You have the option of displaying various views
of the route during destination guidance.
Displaying arrow view
1. Select "Navigation".
2. Select "Arrow display".
The arrow display is shown.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Manually calling up traffic information
*
Symbol with red border: traffic information
is available for the planned route
3 Selecting route criteria
4 Starting/stopping destination
guidance
5 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
6 Distance to the next change of direction
7 Direction of travel
> Outline of an arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route
> Solid arrow:
Arrow points as the crow flies to the cal-
culated route whenever the vehicle is not
in an area recorded on the navigation
DVD, e.g. in a parking garage.
8 Current location
The status line displays the estimated time of
arrival and the distance to the destination.
The arrows change appearance before a change
of direction.
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance to change of direction
3 Change of direction
Exiting the menu
Select the arrow.
Displaying map view
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
128
1. Select "Navigation".
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Select the desired map view:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
Display
1 Displaying the menu in which the informa-
tion last selected can be shown/hidden, re-
fer to Selecting destination using informa-
tion, page 120
2 Starting/stopping destination
guidance
3 Map-guided destination selection
4 Switching voice instructions on/off
5 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
1 Changing map view
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
2 Manually calling up traffic information
*
Symbol with red border: traffic information
is available for the planned route
3 Changing route criteria:
> Prefer highways
> Avoid highways
> Fast route
> Short route
4 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
Exit the menu:
Select the arrow.
The status line displays the estimated time of
arrival and the distance to the destination.
At scales of less than 250 miles or 500 km, you
have the option of deciding whether to orient
the map to north, toward your current direction
of travel, or show the map in perspective. At
scales of 250 miles or 500 km or greater, the
map always points toward north.
Changing map view
Select the corresponding symbol.
The next map view is displayed.
Changing the scale
1. In the map view, change to the top left field.
2. Turn the MINI joystick to change the scale.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
129
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Displaying towns/cities and streets
along the route
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled within
each section of the route are also shown.
1. Select "Navigation".
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Select "Route list".
Exiting the menu
Select the arrow.
Destination guidance
through voice
instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
The voice instructions can be switched on/off in
the arrow or map view:
1. Change to the top right field.
2. Select the symbol.
Switching voice instructions on/off at
any time
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Language / Units".
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "Language".
6. Select "Navigation voice instructions".
The voice instructions are switched on.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction if
necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
130
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Changing a route
Taking detours
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. Select "Navigation".
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Select "New route".
A detour can be made around a specified
section of the total route length.
3. Turn the MINI joystick to enter the desired
number and press the MINI joystick.
The route is recalculated.
Exiting the menu without changing the
route
Select the arrow.
Traffic information*
In many metropolitan areas you can receive
traffic information broadcast by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
During destination guidance, the traffic informa-
tion relevant to the route you are planning to
take is automatically shown and taken into
account in route planning. Irrespective of
whether destination guidance is active, you can
have the traffic information displayed in the
map display or as an event list.
Switching reception of traffic
information on/off
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Traffic Info settings".
5. Select "Traffic Info".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
131
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
The traffic information can be received and
displayed.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info
station with the best reception.
Depending on the station, either the sta-
tion name, frequency, local number or
other information is displayed.<
Calling up traffic information manually
During destination guidance
During destination guidance, traffic information
can be called up manually in the arrow or map
display.
If the symbol is shown with a red border,
there is traffic information regarding the
planned route.
1. Change to the top right field.
2. Select the symbol.
During destination guidance, traffic information
items along the planned route are indicated by
yellow diamonds.
Traffic information on the planned route is
shown first, sorted by distance from the vehicle's
current position.
With destination guidance switched off
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Naviga-
tion" and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Traffic Info".
Traffic information on the planned route is
shown first, sorted by distance from the vehicle's
current position.
Displaying traffic information in
map view
In map view, the traffic information icons are
shown up to a scale of 100 miles or 200 km.
The highlighting of the stretch corresponding to
the traffic report and the icons for the type of
event as described below are displayed and hid-
den. This depends on the selected scale.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
132
Displaying detailed traffic information
Select a traffic information item from the list.
Exiting the menu
Select the arrow.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
133
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Traffic information icons
Traffic event displayed with map
scales larger than 5 miles/10 km;
arrow points in the relevant direc-
tion of travel.
There are several traffic events.
Switch to a smaller map scale to
show more detail.
Traffic light failure
Roadworks
General traffic obstruction
Transport of hazardous load
Vehicle on wrong carriageway
Danger
Low clearance
No parking
Fog
Heavy rain
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road closed
Slow traffic
Traffic backup
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Lane closure
Delay
Police checkpoint
Slow traffic or other traffic event
Stop-and-go traffic
Stopped traffic
Traffic event in both directions of travel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
134
Traffic information during
destination guidance
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected,
refer to page 124.
Displaying traffic obstructions
When the navigation system receives a traffic
obstruction message and "Dynamic route" is not
selected, you will be shown certain information,
such as the length of the traffic congestion,
when you are approx. 25 miles/40 km away
from the traffic obstruction.
The last possible detour exit is indicated just
before you reach it.
This information is displayed even if you have
called up another application on the Control
Display.
Dynamic route planning
When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route will
be changed automatically in the event of a traf-
fic obstruction. The system will not point out
traffic obstructions on the original route.
Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the newly calcu-
lated route may still lead through the traffic
obstruction.
Displaying current
position
You can have your current position displayed
even when the destination guidance is switch-
ed off.
1. Select "Navigation".
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Select "Current position".
The current position of your MINI is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town or city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
Exiting the menu
Select the arrow.
You can also have your current position dis-
played on a map, page 127.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
135
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
What to do if …
What to do if …
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc-
tion to insert the DVD appears on the Control
Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the correct
DVD for the navigation system. This infor-
mation is indicated on the DVD label.
> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise display?
The system is unable to receive enough GPS
signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your current position is not yet
available on your navigation DVD, or the sys-
tem is in the process of calculating your cur-
rent position. As a rule, reception is guaran-
teed when you are in the open.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Choose a
destination as close as possible to the origi-
nal one.
> the destination guidance does not accept an
address without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station in the selected
town, and then start the destination guid-
ance.
> you want to enter a destination for the des-
tination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any letters
to choose from. Choose a destination as
close as possible to the original one.
> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach inter-
sections?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the navigation
DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a turn,
you will see an arrow which indicates the
general direction of your planned route. Or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calcu-
late a new recommended route.
> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
On/off and settings
138
On/off and settings
The following audio sources have shared con-
trols and settings options:
> Radio
> CD player
> CD changer
*
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons near the CD player
> Onboard monitor
> Buttons
on steering wheel, page 11
Buttons near the CD player
1 Drive for audio CDs
2 Eject CD
3 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and CD
changer.
4 Sound output for entertainment on/off,
volume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on the unit, the radio
station or track set most recently is
played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
5 Change audio source
6 Change FM/AM frequency
Operation via onboard monitor
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Enter-
tainment" and press the MINI joystick.
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "HD radio": High Definition Radio
*
> "SAT": satellite radio*
> "CD": CD player or changer
> "AUX": AUX-In port, USB-audio interface
*
The selected audio source is stored for the
remote control currently in use, refer to Personal
Profile, page 26.
Switching on/off
Entertainment audio output
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
139
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
This symbol at the lower edge of the Control
Display indicates that the audio output has been
switched off.
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob to the desired volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio
sources.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer to Personal Profile,
page 26.
Changing tone settings
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Audio".
Treble and bass
1. Select "Treble / Bass".
2. Move the MINI joystick to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".
3. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set-
ting is reached.
Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control automat-
ically increases the volume with increasing driv-
ing speed. You can set various stages for the
increase in volume.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
On/off and settings
140
1. Select "Speed volume".
2. Turn the MINI joystick:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Audio".
5. Select "Reset".
6. Select "Yes".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
141
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
Listening to the radio
Press the button if the sound output is switch-
ed off.
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Enter-
tainment" and press the MINI joystick.
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".
Stations are shown on the Control Display on
the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "All
stations".
If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM
waveband or if the displayed stations are no
longer receivable, you can update the stations
with the best reception, page 142.
Changing stations
Turn the MINI joystick.
Buttons on the CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next displayed
station.
You can also change the station using buttons
on the steering wheel, page 11.
Changing selection criteria
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection cri-
terion displayed.
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "All stations
"*:
Stations that can currently be received in the
"FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
Stations with the best reception in the "AM"
waveband.
For High Definition Radio: stations with the
best reception in the "FM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you stored previously, page 143.
> "Manual":
To set stations that can be received in addi-
tion to those already being displayed, refer
to Selecting the frequency manually,
page 142.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Radio
142
Changing the selection criterion
1. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
2. Select the selection criterion.
Sampling stations, scan
The displayed stations in the current waveband
are automatically sampled in succession.
1. Select "FM" or "AM".
2. Select the selection criterion.
3. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
4. Select "Scan".
The stations are sampled.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the MINI joystick.
2. Select "Scan" again.
Station sampling is interrupted and the selected
station stays on.
Buttons on the CD player
To sample stations, press the button for
the corresponding direction for an extended
time.
Press the button again to end the procedure.
Selecting the frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that can
be received in addition to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM".
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Manual".
4. Turn the MINI joystick to set a certain fre-
quency.
Updating stations with best reception
If on a longer journey you move out of the
reception range of the stations originally
received, you can update the list of stations with
the best reception in the AM waveband.
1. Select "AM".
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select Autostore, e.g. "Autostore".
4. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
143
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
5. Select "Autostore".
The display of the stations with the strongest
reception is updated. The frequencies of the sta-
tions are displayed.
Storing stations
1. Select "FM" or "AM".
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
Select the desired selection criterion.
3. Select the desired frequency or station.
4. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store".
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired
memory location is selected.
The number of the memory location
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
7. Press the MINI joystick.
The station is stored.
The channels of the last selection criterion are
displayed again after a short time.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer to Personal Profile,
page 26.
Changing a memory location
1. Select "Presets".
2. Select the desired station.
3. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
4. Select "Store".
5. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired
memory location is selected.
The number of the memory location
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
6. Press the MINI joystick.
The station is stored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Radio
144
Radio Data System RDS
Radio stations in the FM waveband can broad-
cast additional information, e.g. the station
name, using RDS. If the reception conditions are
good, the station names are shown on the Con-
trol Display. Where reception is poor or in the
event of interference, it may take some time
before the station names will appear in the dis-
play.
Switching RDS on/off*
1. Select "FM".
2. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "RDS".
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control in
use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
HD Radio*
Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
signals. If a digital radio network is available,
these stations can be received digitally and thus
with better sound quality.
Licence conditions
HD Radio
TM
technology manufactured under
licence from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and for-
eign patents. HD Radio
TM
and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of
iBiquity Digital Corp.
Switching digital radio reception on/off
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the ... button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup"
and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "Settings".
4. Select "Audio".
5. Change to the topmost field. Select
"HD radio".
6. Select "Off".
Digital station reception is now switch-
ed on.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
when a station is received digitally.
Some stations do not transmit the digital and
analog signals simultaneously. If you are in an
area in which digital reception of the selected
station is not possible continuously, reception
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
145
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
will alternate between analog and digital. This
can cause repetitions or interruptions. In this
case it may be preferable to switch off digital
reception.
Selecting programs of a digital station*
Some stations broadcast several programs on
a single frequency. To select one of these
programs:
1. Select "FM" or "AM".
2. Select "Manual".
3. Select a station that can be received
digitally.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
when a station is received digitally.
4. Change to the next program of the
digital station using the buttons on the radio
or steering wheel.
Updating digitally receivable stations
If on a longer journey you move out of the
reception range of the stations originally
received, you can update the list of stations
received with the strongest signals.
1. Select "FM" or "AM".
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore".
4. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore ".
The display of the digitally receivable stations is
updated. This can take up to 2 minutes.
Displaying additional information
With digital stations, additional information on
the current track can be displayed, e.g. the
name of the artist.
1. Select a station.
2. Select "Details".
The information is displayed.
When you change to another digitally received
station, any additional information is displayed
after a brief interruption.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Radio
146
Satellite radio*
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have the corresponding pack-
ages enabled.
With this new technology, signal losses
can occur from time to time and result in
audio interruptions.<
Enabling or disabling channels
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the ... button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Enter-
tainment" and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "SAT".
4. Press the MINI joystick.
The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.
Enabling
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled.
A phone number and the electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required to enable or disable a chan-
nel.<
2. To enable the channel:
Dial the phone number.
Disabling
1. Select an enabled channel.
2. Select "ESN".
The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-
played.
The electronic serial number is
required to disable a channel.<
3. To disable the channel:
Dial the phone number.
Selecting and storing a channel
1. Select "SAT".
Channels are shown on the Control Display,
sorted on the basis of selection criteria.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
147
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you previously
stored.
> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.
> "Categories":
All channels, sorted by categories, e.g.
news, jazz.
3. Press the MINI joystick.
4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5. Select a channel marked with this
symbol.
6. Press the MINI joystick.
The selected station is played.
Additional information
1. Select a channel.
2. Select "Details".
The name of the channel and additional infor-
mation on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.
Storing a channel
1. Select the desired channel.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store".
"Presets" is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Radio
148
4. Turn the MINI joystick to select the memory
location and press the MINI joystick.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed again after a
short time.
Changing channels with buttons next to
CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next enabled
channel.
Notes
When more than 4 seconds go by and no signal
is received, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Under some circumstances, e.g. depend-
ing on environmental or topographic con-
ditions, it may not be possible to receive any sig-
nal. The satellite radio has no influence on this.
Signal may be unavailable in tunnels or under-
ground garages, next to high-rise buildings, in
the vicinity of trees, mountains or other strong
sources of radio interference.
Reception usually resumes as soon as the signal
becomes available again.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
149
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files*
CDs with compressed audio files, MP3s, can be
played by the CD player and CD changer.
Starting the CD player
The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled
side up.
The CD is drawn in automatically. Playback starts
automatically if the sound output is on. When
playing CDs with compressed audio files, it can
take the CD player approx. 1 minute to read in
the data, depending on the directory structure.
Starting playback of an inserted CD
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Enter-
tainment" and press the MINI joystick.
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "CD".
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. In cars with a
CD changer, select "CD" to start the
CD player.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is switched on.
Starting the CD changer
1. Fill the CD changer, page 152.
2. Press button .
This opens the start menu.
3. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Enter-
tainment" and press the MINI joystick.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "CD".
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Select the
desired CD.
At the end of the last track, the next CD is
selected and played.
If new CDs have been placed in the CD changer,
playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g. CD 1,
track 1.
The CD changer's load status is indicated on the
Control Display.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
150
Selecting a track
Buttons on the CD player
Press the button for the desired direction
repeatedly until the desired track on the current
CD is reached.
Playback of the CD starts at the beginning of
the track. The track is displayed on the Control
Display.
You can also change the track using the buttons
on the steering wheel, page 11.
Using the onboard monitor
Turn the MINI joystick to select a track.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the directory if necessary.
2. Select a track and press the MINI joystick.
To change the directory:
Select a directory and press the MINI joystick.
Exit the menu:
Select the arrow.
Displaying information about the track*
With compressed audio files, any information
about the current track that has been recorded
can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the MINI joystick.
2. Select "Details".
The information is shown for the current track.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Sampling tracks, Scan
All tracks on the current CD are automatically
sampled once in succession.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
151
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
1. Select a track.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan".
Stop sampling:
1. Press the MINI joystick.
2. Select "Scan".
Track sampling is interrupted and the selected
track is played on.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To scan all tracks in the current directory:
Select "Scan directory".
> To scan all tracks on the CD: Select
"Scan all".
Stop sampling
1. Press the MINI joystick.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all".
Sampling is interrupted and the selected track
is retained.
Repeating tracks
1. Select a track.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Repeat".
The current track on the CD is repeated.
Stop repeating
1. Press the MINI joystick again.
2. Select "Repeat".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
152
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track: Select
"Repeat track".
> To repeat all tracks in the current direc-
tory: Select "Repeat directory".
Stop repeating
1. Press the MINI joystick.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory".
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
1. Select a track.
2. Press the MINI joystick.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Random".
Stop random function
1. Press the MINI joystick.
2. Select "Random".
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play back the tracks in the current
directory in random order: Select "Ran-
dom directory".
> To play back all tracks on the CD in ran-
dom order: Select "Random all".
Stop random function
1. Press the MINI joystick.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all".
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is
distorted.
CD changer
The MINI CD changer for 6 CDs is installed in the
dashboard.
When loading CDs into or removing them
from the CD changer, hold them at their
edges and do not touch the reflective signal-
sensing area.<
Opening
Briefly press the bottom edge of the cover.
Closing
Push the cover back into its original position.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent, close the cover after use while the
vehicle is being driven.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
153
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Controls and displays
1 LEDs at the CD slot
LEDs flash when a CD can be inserted.
2 Buttons for CD compartments
LED is lit when a CD is in the compartment.
Filling the CD changer
1. Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment
flashes.
2. To select another compartment if necessary:
... Press the ... button.
3. When the LEDs 1 next to the CD slot flash,
insert a single CD.
The CD is drawn in automatically and is
placed in the selected CD compartment.
Only insert the CD when the LEDs 1
next to the CD slot are flashing,
otherwise the CD or CD changer may be
damaged.
Do not push the CD while it is being drawn in
as this may cause it to jam and become
impossible to eject.<
4. To fill additional CD compartments:
Repeat steps 1-3.
5. Close the cover after the CDs have been fully
drawn in.
Filling empty CD compartments
1. Press the button for a longer period.
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments
flash.
2. When the LEDs 1 next to the CD slot flash,
insert a single CD.
The CD is drawn in automatically and is
placed in the first vacant CD compartment.
Only insert the CD when the LEDs 1
next to the CD slot are flashing,
otherwise the CD or CD changer may be
damaged.
Do not push the CD while it is being drawn in
as this may cause it to jam and become
impossible to eject.<
3. Wait for the CD to be drawn in.
4. To fill additional CD compartments:
Repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Close the cover after the CDs have been fully
drawn in.
Removing CDs from the CD changer
1. Press the button.
2. ... Press the ... button to select a
CD compartment.
The CD is partially ejected from the CD
changer.
3. Remove the CD.
4. Close the cover after the CDs have been
removed.
Removing all CDs from the CD changer
1. Press the button for a longer period.
The CDs are partially ejected from the CD
changer one after the other.
2. Remove the CDs.
3. Close the cover after the CDs have been
removed.
Malfunction
If all LEDs on the CD changer are flashing rapidly,
there is a malfunction.
To solve the problem:
1. Press button or .
The CD inserted last is ejected.
2. Remove the CD.
If the LEDs stop flashing rapidly, the CD changer
is operational again.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
154
Notes
MINI CD/DVD players and changers are of-
ficially designated Class 1 laser products.
Do not operate if the cover is damaged, other-
wise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause ir-
reparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other-
wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
,
otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
MINI CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has
been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and tem-
porarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/
DVDs, one of the following factors may be the
cause.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent data-
creation or recording processes, or poor quality
or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Dirty or damaged CDs/DVDs
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1207/506, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the man-
ufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs
cannot be played or can only be played to a lim-
ited extent.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
155
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
AUX-In port
You can connect an external audio device, for
instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system. You can
adjust the tone on the onboard monitor.
Connecting
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm.
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-In port.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer
to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Enter-
tainment" and press the MINI joystick.
3. Select "AUX".
4. Select "AUX IN".
5. Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
USB-audio interface
156
USB-audio interface
Connections for
external devices
An external audio device or USB device can
be connected to the USB-audio interface, for
example:
> MP3 player
> USB memory stick
> iPod/iPhone
> Suitable mobile phone
If they are supported by the USB-audio inter-
face, these devices can be controlled using the
onboard monitor.
If the mobile phone has a music player connec-
tion, connect the mobile phone using the snap-
in adapter, refer to the separate Owner's Man-
ual. Audio playback is only possible if there is no
device connected to the USB-audio interface.
The standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA,
WAV (PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U
format can be played.
Due the variety of audio devices and iPods on
the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every
device will be operable on the vehicle.
Ask your MINI Service which audio devices,
mobile phones or USB devices are suitable.
Connecting via the USB-audio interface
1 Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
iPod/iPhone
To connect the iPod, use the cable adapter for
the Apple iPod.
For additional information, contact your MINI
Dealer or visit the Internet at www.MINI.com
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the iPod/ /iPhone to
ports 1 and 2.
The iPod/iPhone's menu structure is supported
by the USB-audio interface.
USB device
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the USB device to
port 2.
After the device is connected for the first time,
the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of
music) and the playlists are transferred from the
USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may
take some time. The duration depends on the
USB device and the number of tracks.
During transfer, you can call up the tracks using
the directories and file names.
After transfer, you can also call up the tracks
using the information and playlists.
Information from up to four USB devices or
for approx. 16,000 tracks can be stored on the
vehicle.
If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than
16,000 tracks are to be stored, the information
on existing tracks is deleted.
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights
Management (DRM) cannot be played.<
Starting audio playback
1. Press the ... button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Enter-
tainment" and press the MINI joystick.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
157
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
3. Select "AUX" and press the MINI joystick.
4. Select "USB" or the name of the audio device
and press the MINI joystick.
Playback begins with the first track.
When you connect an iPhone via the snap-in
adapter and an audio device to the AUX-In port,
the audio signal from the AUX-In port is played.
Selecting a track
You can call up the tracks using the playlists and
information. With USB devices you can also call
up tracks using the file directory. The tracks can
be displayed if they have been stored in the
Latin alphabet.
1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art-
ists", and press the MINI joystick.
2. Select a track and press the MINI joystick.
Displaying information about the track
Any information about the current track that has
been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Press the MINI joystick during playback.
2. Select "Details" and press the MINI joystick.
Information on the current track is displayed.
Repeating tracks
1. Select a current track and press the MINI
joystick.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the MINI
joystick.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the MINI joystick.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the MINI
joystick.
Random play sequence
You can play the tracks in the selected list in ran-
dom order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
1. Select a current track and press the MINI
joystick.
2. Select "Random" and press the MINI
joystick.
Stop random play:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
USB-audio interface
158
1. Press the MINI joystick.
2. Select "Random" and press the MINI
joystick.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to ex-
treme environmental conditions, e.g. very
high temperatures, refer to the operating in-
structions of the audio device. Otherwise the au-
dio device may become damaged, which could
compromise safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in every case.
Notes on connecting
> The USB-audio interface supplies the con-
nected audio devices with power, provided
that this is supported by the audio device.
Therefore, do not connect the USB audio
device to the power socket in the vehicle
during operation.
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB-audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB-audio interface to
charge external devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Refueling
162
Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling,
otherwise fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler door
Opening
1. Open fuel filler door.
2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler door.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap, otherwise the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message
will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or
missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler door
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
manually unlock the fuel filler door:
1. Remove the cover from the left-hand side-
wall of the cargo bay.
MINI:
MINI Convertible:
2. Pull on the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. The fuel filler door is released.
By way of example, the illustration shows the
sidewall of the cargo compartment in the MINI.
Observe the following when refueling
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel, otherwise there is a danger of per-
sonal injury and property damage.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
163
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> premature pump shutoff.
> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov-
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
If the range displayed is less than
30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-
wise engine functions are not guaranteed and
damage could occur.<
Approx. 13.2 US gallons/50 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters.
Fuel specifications
Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise
permanent damage to the catalytic con-
verter will result.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing
85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise,
the engine and fuel supply system will be
damaged.<
Required fuel
Super Premium gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:
> Cooper S, John Cooper Works: 89
> Cooper: 87
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures. This
has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant differ-
ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight,
that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to defects
in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
164
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-
sure.
Checking pressure
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that can not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and
the risk of an accident. Do not drive with
deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using Run-
Flat Tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Check the tire inflation pressures only on cold
tires. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/
2 km driving or when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm,
the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After adjusting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the flat tire monitor, page 79,
or reset the tire pressure control, page 81.<
Checking the tire inflation pressure of
the space-saver spare tire*
A valve extension for checking the inflation pres-
sure is located behind the bumper.
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The tire inflation pressures apply to
the tire sizes approved and the tire
brands recommended by the manufacturer of
your MINI. Your MINI Dealer will be glad to
advise you.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving speeds of up to 100 mph or
160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving com-
fort, adjust pressures to the respective tire infla-
tion pressures listed on the following pages in
the columns for traveling speeds up to a maxi-
mum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's-side door post when the driver's
door is open.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
165
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
The maximum permissible speed for these
tire pressures is 100 mph or 160 km/h. Do
not exceed this speed, otherwise tire damage
and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving above
100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the laws could
occur.
MINI Cooper tire inflation pressures
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Speeds up to a
max. of 100 mph /
160 km/h
Speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold
tires. Cold = ambient tem-
perature
175/65 R 15 84 T M+S
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S
175/65 R 15 84 H
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H
195/55 R 16 87 H RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
33/230 33/230 33/230 33/230 38/260 38/260
Emergency wheel:
115/70 R 15 90 M
60/420 60/420 – – 60/420 60/420
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
166
MINI Cooper S tire inflation pressures
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Speeds up to a
max. of 100 mph /
160 km/h
Speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold
tires. Cold = ambient tem-
perature
195/55 R 16 87 V
195/55 R 16 87 V RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
33/230 33/230 33/230 33/230 38/260 38/260
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
38/260 38/260 38/260 38/260 41/280 41/280
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
167
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
MINI John Cooper Works tire inflation pressures
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Speeds up to a
max. of 100 mph/
160 km/h
Speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 W RSC
38/260 38/260 38/260 38/260 41/280 41/280
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC 41/280 41/280 41/280 41/280 44/300 44/300
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
168
MINI Cooper Convertible tire inflation pressures
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Speeds up to a
max. of 100 mph /
160 km/h
Speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold
tires. Cold = ambient tem-
perature
175/65 R 15 84 T M+S
175/65 R 15 84 H
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H
195/55 R 16 87 H RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
35/240 35/240 35/240 35/240 38/260 38/260
Emergency wheel:
115/70 R 15 90 M
60/420 60/420 – – 60/420 60/420
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
169
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
MINI Cooper S Convertible tire inflation pressures
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Speeds up to a
max. of 100 mph /
160 km/h
Speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold
tires. Cold = ambient tem-
perature
195/55 R 16 87 V
195/55 R 16 87 V RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
35/240 35/240 35/240 35/240 38/260 38/260
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
39/270 39/270 39/270 39/270 42/290 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
170
MINI John Cooper Works Convertible tire inflation pressures
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Speeds up to a
max. of 100 mph/
160 km/h
Speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 W RSC
39/270 39/270 39/270 39/270 42/290 42/290
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC 42/290 42/290 42/290 42/290 45/310 45/310
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
171
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Tire coding
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter
Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking trac-
tion tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
225/45 R 17 91 V
e.g.
Manufacturer's
code for tire make
Tire size and
tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 0309
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
172
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – Run-Flat Tires
You will recognize Run-Flat Tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of
the tire, page 173.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires regularly for tread wear, signs
of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the
tread. Check the tread depth.
Tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
Winter tires
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. When tire tread is worn
down to the level of the wear indicators, the
remaining tread depth is 1/16 in/1.6 mm.
Tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscepti-
ble to road hazard and consequential damages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immediately
and have wheels and tires thoroughly
checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest
MINI Dealer or tire shop that works according to
MINI repair procedures with correspondingly
trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle
towed there.
Otherwise tire damage can be extremely dan-
gerous for vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding:
DOT ... 0309 means that the tire was manufac-
tured in week 3 of 2009.
For various reasons, such as the development of
brittleness, the manufacturer of your MINI rec-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
173
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
ommends tire replacement after no more
than 6 years, regardless of the actual wear of
the tires.
Run-Flat Tires*
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-Flat Tires comprise a conditionally self-sup-
porting tire and a special rim. The reinforcement
in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can con-
tinue to be used subject to certain restrictions,
even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 80.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires mounted only
by your MINI Dealer or a specialized tire
shop that has specially trained personnel work-
ing in accordance with the specifications of the
MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried out
properly, there is a danger of subsequent dam-
age and related safety hazards. Make sure that
the new wheels are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your MINI recom-
mends that you avoid using retreaded
tires, as this could impair driving safety. The
causes for this include potentially different
tire casing structures and often wide varia-
tions in tire age, which can result in a limited
service life.<
Correct wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your MINI recom-
mends mounting only wheels and tires
that it has specifically approved for use on your
particular model. Although other wheels and
tires may theoretically have the same dimen-
sions, variations in factors such as manufactur-
ing tolerances can result in contact between tire
and bodywork, ultimately leading to serious
accidents. The manufacturer of your MINI can-
not evaluate non-approved wheels and tires to
determine if they are suited for use, and there-
fore cannot ensure the operating safety of the
vehicle if they are mounted.<
Your MINI Dealer will be glad to inform you
about the correct wheel and tire combination for
your vehicle.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS and DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-
nation again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over from
summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the Tire
Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a
puncture, refer to page 83. Your MINI Dealer will
be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
174
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your MINI
recommends certain tire brands. They are
marked with a clearly visible MINI designation
on the sidewall of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Run-Flat Tires*
When mounting new tires or changing over from
summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount
Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. Keep in mind
that no space-saver spare tire is available in the
event of a flat. Your MINI Dealer will be glad to
advise you.
Special characteristics of winter tires
The manufacturer of MINI recommends the use
of winter tires on snowy roads or if temperatures
drop below 457/ +76. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for
the winter tires mounted on your car; fail-
ure to do so could result in tire damage and
accidents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
tires must be displayed in your field of view. Spe-
cialist tire dealers and your MINI Dealer can sup-
ply these labels.
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-
sure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.
Swapping wheels among the axles
Depending on the individual use, front and rear
tires may exhibit different wear and tear.
In order to maintain an even wear and tear, the
wheels may be rotated between the axles. Your
MINI Dealer will be glad to advise you.
Always check the inflation pressure after the tire
rotation, if necessary change the pressure.
Snow chains*
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of your MINI,
classified as road-safe and recommended. Con-
tact your MINI Dealer for more details.
Only attach snow chains in pairs to the front
wheels with the following tires.
> 175/65 R 15 M+S
> 175/60 R 16 M+S
John Cooper Works:
> 185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph or 50 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted, otherwise the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, it can be useful
to briefly deactivate the DSC or activate the DTC,
refer to page 77.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
175
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Under the bonnet
Do not work on the car unless you possess
the necessary technical knowledge. If you
are not familiar with the regulations to be
observed, have the necessary work on your
vehicle carried out only by a MINI Dealer or a
workshop that has specially trained personnel
working in accordance with the specifications of
the MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried
out properly, there is a danger of subsequent
damage and related safety hazards.<
Bonnet
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Do not clean the windshield and head-
lamps if the bonnet is unlocked as this
may damage the headlamp washer system
*.<
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the bonnet.<
Press the release handle and open the bonnet.
Closing
Close the bonnet from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
If you notice any signs while driving your
vehicle that the bonnet is not completely
closed, stop at once and close it securely.
Make sure that the closing path of the bonnet is
clear, otherwise injuries may result.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Under the bonnet
176
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Battery, under the cover 197
2 Engine oil dipstick 176
3 Engine oil filler neck 177
4 Coolant expansion tank 177
5 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlamp
and window washer system 57
6 Engine compartment fuse box 195
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking engine oil level
1. With the vehicle's engine at normal operat-
ing temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted
driving for at least 6 miles/10 km, park the
vehicle on a level surface.
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Pull the dipstick out after approx. 5 minutes
and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth, paper
towel or similar material.
4. Carefully push the dipstick all the way into
the guide tube and pull it out again.
The oil level should be between the two
marks on the dipstick.
The oil quantity corresponding to the difference
between the two marks on the dipstick is 1 US
quart/1 liter.
Do not fill beyond the upper mark on
the dipstick. Excess oil will damage the
engine.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
177
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Adding engine oil
Do not add the maximum quantity of 1 US
quart/1 liter of engine oil until the oil level has
dropped to just above the lower mark on the
dipstick, page 176.
Add oil within the next 30 miles/50 km,
otherwise the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the warnings on
the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may
result.<
Oil change
Have the oil changed only by a MINI Dealer or a
workshop that has specially trained personnel
working in accordance with the specifications of
the MINI manufacturer.
Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. Based on extensive testing, the man-
ufacturer of your MINI regularly approves cer-
tain grades of engine oil.
Only use High Performance Synthetic Oil
approved by the manufacturer of your MINI.
If MINI High Performance Synthetic Oil is not
available, you can add small quantities of
another synthetic oil in between oil changes.
Only use oils with the API SM specification or
higher.
If you have any further questions regard-
ing MINI High Performance Synthetic Oil
or approved synthetic oils, your MINI Dealer will
be glad to advise you.<
You can also call MINI USA at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website
www.miniusa.com to obtain this information.
Viscosity grades
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is categorized in SAE classes.
The correct SAE grade for your MINI is deter-
mined by the climatic conditions of the region in
which you normally drive your MINI.
The approved oils are SAE 0W-40, 0W-30,
5W-40 and 5W-30.<
These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your MINI. Your MINI Dealer knows
which additives are suitable and will be glad to
advise you.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. Because addi-
tives are harmful to your health, it is important
to follow the instructions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environmen-
tal protection regulations when disposing
of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the Min and Max markings.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Under the bonnet
178
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
179
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Maintenance
MINI Maintenance System
The MINI Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your MINI. The objective is to optimize efforts
with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance
costs.
If and when you come to sell your MINI, a com-
prehensive record of servicing will prove a signif-
icant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the different
driving conditions of your MINI into account.
Condition Based Service uses this to determine
the current and future service requirements. By
letting you define a service and maintenance
regimen that reflects your own individual
requirements, the system builds the basis for
trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, page 65.
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your MINI Dealer can read
out this data from the remote control unit, and
propose an optimized maintenance approach.
Whenever you take your car in for servicing you
should therefore hand your MINI Dealer the
remote control unit that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor-
rectly, page 69; otherwise the effective-
ness of Condition Based Service CBS is not
assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
The manufacturer of the MINI recom-
mends that you have service and repair
operations performed at your MINI Dealer.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries ver-
ify that your vehicle has received the specified
regular maintenance.<
Socket for Onboard
Diagnosis OBD
Primary components that make up exhaust
emissions can be checked by a device via the
OBD socket.
This socket is located to the left of the driver's
side, on the bottom of the instrument panel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Maintenance
180
Exhaust emission values
The warning lamps come on. The
exhaust emission values have turned
poor and there is a danger of engine
damage. You can continue your jour-
ney, but moderate your speed and exercise due
caution. Have the car checked as soon as possi-
ble.
Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps
will flash or light up continuously. This indicates
excessive misfiring or a malfunction in the
engine. If this happens, reduce your speed and
visit the nearest MINI Dealer as soon as possible.
Severe misfiring can quickly lead to serious dam-
age of emissions-related components, espe-
cially the catalytic converter. In addition,
mechanical engine components can become
damaged.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened, the
OBD system may conclude that fuel vapors are
escaping, causing an indicator to light up. If the
filler cap is then tightened, the indicator should
go out within a few days.
Event data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring or diagnostic modules or a
device for recording or sending certain vehicle
data or information.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
181
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Care
Car-care products
Regular cleaning and care helps to maintain the
value of your MINI.
The manufacturer of your MINI recommends
using manufacturer-approved products to clean
and care for your vehicle.
MINI Service would be pleased to advise you
on cleaning and care products and services for
your MINI.
The ingredients of original MINI CareProd-
ucts have been tested, and the products
have been tested in the laboratory and in prac-
tice. They offer optimum care and protection for
your vehicle.<
Do not use any cleansers containing
alcohol or solvents as these may cause
damage.<
Cleaning agents may contain hazardous
or health-damaging substances. Follow
the warning and hazard instructions on the
packaging. For interior cleaning, always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle.
Do not use any products that are not intended
for cleaning the vehicle.<
External care
Washing your vehicle
Especially during the winter months the
vehicle should be frequently washed. Dirt
and road salt can damage the vehicle.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them, otherwise
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and the brake rotors can corrode.<
Car washes
Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
Do not use automatic high-pressure car
washes, otherwise water may drip into the
vehicle around the windows.<
Before driving into the car wash, check if the sys-
tem is suitable for your MINI. Observe the fol-
lowing points:
> Dimensions of the vehicle, page 203
> If necessary: Fold in the outside mirrors,
page 46.
> Maximum permissible tire width
Avoid car washes with tracks higher than
4 in/10 cm, otherwise the chassis could be
damaged.<
Preparations for driving into the car wash:
> Unscrew the rod antenna.
> Deactivate the rain sensor
* to prevent unin-
tentional wiping.
> Deactivate the rear window wiper
* and pro-
tect it from damage. Ask the car wash oper-
ator about measures that can be taken to
protect the wipers.
> Remove additional attachments, e.g. spoil-
ers or telephone antennas, if there is a pos-
sibility that they could be damaged.
Automatic transmission
Before driving into the car wash, make sure that
the vehicle can roll:
1. Place the remote control, even with conve-
nient access, in the ignition lock.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Insert the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Steam jets/high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, ensure that you maintain a suffi-
cient distance to the vehicle and do not exceed a
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Care
182
maximum temperature of 1407/606.
If the distance is too close, the pressure too high,
or the temperature too high, parts of the vehicle
can be damaged, or water can penetrate.
Observe the operating instructions for high-
pressure washers.<
Do not spray sensors such as Park
Distance Control with high-pressure
washers for a long time or at a distance of less
than 1 ft/30 cm.<
Manual washing
Use a great deal of water and, if necessary, car
shampoo when washing your car by hand. Clean
the vehicle with a sponge or a washing brush
applying a slight amount of pressure.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or turn off the ignition
to prevent unintentional wiping.<
Observe local regulations regarding wash-
ing vehicles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not wipe dry and do not use abrasive or cor-
rosive cleaning agents. Remove dirt and con-
tamination, such as insects, by soaking with
shampoo and then washing with plenty of
water.
Do not remove accumulated ice and snow with
an ice scraper; use window de-icers instead.
Windows
Clean the outside and inside of the windows and
mirrors with a window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and change regularly to
prevent the formation of streaks
Wax, preservatives and dirt on the win-
dows cause streaks when the windshield
wipers are on, and can cause premature wear
of the wiper blades and interfere with the rain
sensor.<
Care of the convertible top
The appearance and service life of the convert-
ible top largely depends on its proper care and
operation.
Please follow these instructions:
> Never attempt to fold and stow the convert-
ible top in the convertible compartment
when the top is wet or frozen. Otherwise
water stains, mildew, and chafe marks
may occur.
> If water spots occur on the inside headliner
despite precautions, remove them using a
microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.
> If the vehicle is parked in an enclosed area
for a longer period of time, make sure that
there is sufficient ventilation.
> Remove any bird droppings immediately,
since they have corrosive properties which
will corrode the convertible top and damage
the rubber seals.
When attempting to remove stains from
the convertible top, do not use spot
removers, paint thinners, solvents, gasoline, or
similar fluids. These cleaners may damage the
rubber seals. The improper care or cleaning
methods may cause the convertible top and its
seams to leak.<
Use special convertible top cleaning agents if
attempting to remove heavy stains.
Always read and follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Use an impregnating agent to treat the convert-
ible top once a year.
Paintwork, care
Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value
and protects the paint from the long-term
effects of aggressive substances.
In some regions, environmental factors can
affect the vehicle paintwork and damage it. It is
therefore important to adjust the frequency and
extent of vehicle care correspondingly.
Immediately remove aggressive materials such
as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap or
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
183
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
bird droppings to prevent damage to the
paintwork.
Removing paintwork damage
Depending on the severity of the damage,
immediately repair stone damage or
scratches to prevent rusting.<
The manufacturer of the MINI recommends
repairing paint damage professionally according
to factory specifications with original MINI
paints.
Preservation
Preservation is necessary when water no longer
beads on the clean paint surface. To preserve
the paint, only use preservatives that contain
carnauba or synthetic waxes.
Rubber seals
Only treat with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon sprays or other silicon-
containing care products on rubber seals,
otherwise noise and damage could occur.<
Chrome parts*
Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radiator
grill and door handles with copious quantities of
water and, if necessary, a shampoo additive,
especially when contaminated with road salt.
For additional treatment, use chrome polish.
Light-alloy wheels*
The system produces brake dust that collects on
the light alloy wheels. Clean them regularly with
acid-free wheel cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acid-containing
highly alkaline or abrasive cleansers or
steam jets above 1407/606 as they may
cause damage.<
External sensors
Keep the outside sensors on the vehicle
such as the Park Distance Control clean
and ice-free to ensure that they function
properly.<
Internal care
Upholstery/fabrics
Regularly use a vacuum cleaner to remove sur-
face dirt.
In case of serious spots such as liquid stains, use
a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth and
suitable interior cleaners. Observe the instruc-
tions on the packaging.
Clean upholstery up to the seams. Do not
rub forcefully.<
Velcro fasteners on pants or other items of
clothing can damage seat covers. Make
sure that all Velcro fasteners are closed.<
Leather/leather coverings*
The leather processed by the manufac-
turer of your MINI is a high-quality natural
product. Light variations in the grain is one of
the typical properties of natural leather.<
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
to become brittle prematurely. Use a cloth or
vacuum cleaner to remove dust on a regular
basis.
Especially when the leather has a light color, it
should be cleaned regularly since it tends to get
heavily soiled.
Treat the leather twice a year using a leather
lotion since dirt and grease will gradually attack
the leather's protective layer.
Carpets/floor mats*
You can use a vacuum cleaner on carpets and
floor mats, or clean them with interior cleaners
when they are very dirty.
Floor mats can be removed to be cleaned. When
putting the floor mats, back in, make sure that
the seat rails do not extend over the floor mats
as this may damage them.
Lint on floor mats arises from manufacturing
and can be removed by repeated vacuuming.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Care
184
Interior plastic parts
These include:
> Plastic surfaces
> Lamp glass
> Display panes
> Matte parts
Only clean with water and, if necessary, solvent-
free plastic cleaners.
Do not use solvents such as alcohol, lac-
quer thinner, cold cleaners, fuel, or similar,
as these will damage the surfaces.<
Decorative strips*
Only clean decorative strips with moist cloths.
Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Displays
To clean displays such as radios or display ele-
ments, use a display cleaning cloth or a soft,
non-scratching, lint-free cloth.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning
the display as this can cause damage.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep fluids of any
kind away from the device. Surfaces or electrical
components may otherwise become corroded
or damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use cleaning CDs as this could
damage parts of the drive.<
Vehicle storage
If you are not going to drive your car for more
than three months, please ask for advice from
your MINI dealer or a workshop that works
according to MINI manufacturer specifications.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
185
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
Your vehicle comes with an onboard tool kit that
varies with the equipment version; it is stored
underneath the level load floor.
> Mobility System with onboard tool kit and
tire change set
* 190
> Tire change set with onboard tool kit for
space-saver spare tire 192
Wiper blades
Changing the front wiper blades
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Position the wiper blade horizontally.
3. Press the securing spring, arrow.
4. Unhook the wiper blade toward the wind-
shield.
5. Pull the wiper blade past the wiper arm
toward the top.
6. Insert the new wiper blade.
7. Press into position until you hear it engage.
8. Fold down the wiper arm.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the bonnet.<
MINI: Changing the rear wiper blade
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Rotate the wiper blade toward the back as
far as it will go, arrow.
3. Press the wiper blade against the limit and
thus out of the mounting.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixture
until it engages audibly.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be
handled carefully. The manufacturer of your
MINI recommends having your MINI Dealer per-
form any work that you do not feel competent to
perform yourself or that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your MINI Dealer.
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
186
sumer in question, otherwise short circuits could
result. To avoid possible injury or equipment
damage when replacing bulbs, observe any
instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
Caring for headlamps, refer to page 182.
For any bulb replacement not described
below, contact a MINI Dealer or a work-
shop that has specially trained personnel work-
ing in accordance with the specifications of the
MINI manufacturer.<
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your MINI Dealer.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light sources for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes are related to conven-
tional laser diodes, and legislation defines them
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours, otherwise this could cause irri-
tation to the retina.<
Bi-Xenon lamps*
The service life of these bulbs is very long and
the probability of failure very low, provided that
they are not switched on and off an excessive
number of times. If a xenon lamp fails neverthe-
less, switch on the fog lamps and continue the
journey with great care, provided that local leg-
islation does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacement, carried out
only by a MINI Dealer or a workshop that has
specially trained personnel working in accor-
dance with the specifications of the MINI manu-
facturer. Due to high voltage, there is a risk of
fatal injury if work on the xenon lamps is carried
out improperly.<
Halogen low beams and high beams
H13 bulb, 60/55 watts
The H13 bulb is pressurized. Therefore,
wear safety glasses and protective gloves.
Otherwise there is a risk of injury if the bulb is
damaged.<
Be careful when installing the cover, oth-
erwise leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
Accessing the lamp from the
engine compartment
The low-beam/high-beam bulb can be changed
from the engine compartment.
Removing the cover:
1. Press the tab.
2. Flip open the cover and take it out of the
holder.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat-
tach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover, oth-
erwise leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
Replacing the bulb
1. Turn the lamp counterclockwise, arrow 1,
and remove it, arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
187
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
2. Push on the catch, arrow 1, and unplug the
connector, arrow 2.
3. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Turn signal indicators, parking lamps,
roadside parking lamps and fog lamps
Accessing the lamps via the wheel well
1 Turn signal
2 Parking/roadside parking/fog lamps
Replacing a turn signal bulb
21 watt bulb, PY 21 W
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 1.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Remove the inside cover.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
4. Screw out the bulb counterclockwise.
5. To insert the new bulb and replace the cov-
ers, proceed in reverse order.
Replacing a parking/roadside parking
lamp bulb
5 watt bulb, W 5 W
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Screw out the upper bulb counterclockwise.
4. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
188
Replacing a fog lamp bulb
H8 bulb, 35 watts
1. Turn in the wheel.
2. Remove cover 2.
To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
3. Screw out the lower bulb counterclockwise.
4. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Side turn signal indicators
5 watt bulb, W 5 W
1. Push the lamp with the ventilation grate
forward and remove.
2. Screw out the bulb holder counterclockwise.
3. Pull out and replace the bulb.
4. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Tail lamps
1 Brake lamp/tail lamp
21 watt/5 watt bulb, W 5 W
2 Turn signal lamp
21 watt bulb, P 21 W
3 Backup lamp
21 watt bulb, P 21 W
Lamp access
MINI:
Remove the cover from the sidewall of the
cargo bay.
MINI Convertible:
Move the convertible top to its uppermost posi-
tion, see Loading aid page 104, and remove the
cover of the luggage compartment side wall.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
189
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Changing
1. Screw out the desired bulb counterclock-
wise, arrows 1.
Additional bulbs are located behind the
sidewall of the cargo bay, arrow 2.
2. To insert the new bulb and replace the
cover, proceed in reverse order.
Rear fog lamp*
21 watt bulb, P 21 W
Access to the lamp via the back or underside of
the bumper.
The illustration shows the fog lamp in the
bumper of the MINI Cooper.
1. Screw out the bulb holder counterclockwise.
2. Screw out and replace the bulb.
3. To insert the new bulb and bulb holder, pro-
ceed in reverse order.
License plate lamps
5 watt bulb, C 5 W
1. Using a screwdriver, push the lamp to the
left in the tab of the lamp housing, arrow 1.
2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Insert the lamp.
Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation. In
the event of a malfunction, contact your MINI
Dealer or a workshop that has specially trained
personnel working in accordance with the spec-
ifications of your MINI manufacturer.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures in the event of a break-
down:
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic and switch on the hazard warning
flashers.
Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock. Engage the parking
brake and shift into 1st or reverse gear or place
the selector lever in position P.
All passengers should be outside the vehicle and
in a safe place, e.g. behind a guardrail.
Erect a warning triangle or warning flasher at the
appropriate distance if necessary. Comply with
all safety guidelines and regulations.<
In the event of a flat tire, different procedures
should be followed depending on the equip-
ment included in your vehicle:
> MINI Mobility System, refer to the following
section
> Run-Flat Tires, page 173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
190
> Tire change with space-saver spare tire,
page 192
MINI Mobility System with onboard tool
kit and tire change set*
Follow the instructions on using the Mobil-
ity System found on the compressor and
the sealant bottle.<
Do not remove foreign bodies which have pen-
etrated the tire if possible.
Pull the sticker for the speed restriction off and
apply it to the steering wheel.
The Mobility System with onboard tool kit and
tire change set
* is located under the floor mat in
the cargo bay.
1 Filling canister
2 Hexagon wrench
*
3 Vehicle jack*
4 Wheel stud wrench
5 Flat screwdriver/Phillips screwdriver, towing
eyelet
6 Compressor
7 Package with filling hose, valve remover,
valve insert and speed restriction label
Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec-
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more. Contact the nearest MINI
Dealer if the tire cannot be made drivable with
the Mobility System.<
Liquid sealant
1 Filling hose
2 Filling canister
Filling
1. Shake the filling canister.
2. Screw the filling hose onto the filling
canister.
3. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the
defective tire.
4. Screw out the valve core with the valve
remover. The valve remover is located in a
package with the filling hose.
5. Remove the cap from the filling hose.
6. Push the filling hose onto the tire valve.
7. Hold the filling canister with the cap down
and squeeze.
8. Squeeze the entire contents of the canister
into the tire.
9. Remove the filling hose.
10. Screw the valve core into the tire valve with
the valve remover.
In the event of a lost or dirty valve core
you will find another valve core in the
package with the filling hose.
Remember that the liquid canister must be
replaced every four years if the equipment has
not been used.<
Compressor
Connector, cable and connection hose are
stored in the compressor housing.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
191
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
1 Connector and cable for lighter socket
2 Connection hose for connecting the com-
pressor and tire valve
3 On/off switch
4 Pressure gauge for indicating the tire infla-
tion pressure
5 Release button for reducing the tire inflation
pressure
Reinflating the tire
1. Unscrew the dust cap from the tire valve of
the defective tire.
2. Screw connection hose 2 onto the tire valve.
3. Insert connector 1 into the lighter socket in
the interior of the vehicle, page 99.
4. Switch on the compressor using switch 3.
5. Inflate the tire to at least 26 psi/180 kPa and
at most 36 psi/250 kPa.
To check the inflation pressure, switch off
the compressor briefly.
Do not run the compressor for longer
than 6 minutes, otherwise the device
will overheat and possibly be damaged.<
If an air pressure of 26 psi/180 kPa is not
reached:
1. Unscrew connection hose 2 and drive the
vehicle forward and backward about 33 ft/
10 m to distribute the liquid sealant in the
tires evenly.
2. Repeat the procedure.
If an inflation pressure of 26 psi/180 kPa
still cannot be reached, the tire is too
heavily damaged. Please contact the nearest
MINI Dealer.<
Distributing liquid sealant
Immediately drive for approx. 10 minutes, so
that the liquid sealant is uniformly distributed.
Do not exceed speeds of 40 mph/
60 km/h.
If possible, do not drop below 10 mph/
20 km/h.<
Checking tire inflation pressure
1. After driving for approx. 10 minutes, pull
over at a suitable location.
2. Screw connection hose 2 onto the tire valve.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure.
The tire pressure must be at least
18 psi/130 kPa. If it is not, do not con-
tinue driving.<
If a tire pressure of at least 18 psi/130 kPa is
displayed:
1. Switch on the compressor. Correct the tire
inflation pressure to the specified value,
page 164.
2. Replace the tire as soon as possible.
Driving on
Do not exceed the permitted maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; doing so may
result in an accident.<
Replace the defective tire as soon as possible
and have the new wheel/tire assembly bal-
anced.
Have the Mobility System refilled.
Tire change set
When changing a tire, always observe the safety
measures and the procedure for changing tires
described below.
In case of a flat tire, the tire change set is
not needed due to the availability of the
Mobility System.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
192
Changing wheels
Space-saver spare tire*
To change a space-saver spare tire, proceed
as follows:
> Remove the space-saver spare tire,
page 192
> Prepare for tire change, page 193
> Jack up vehicle, page 193
> Mount space-saver spare tire, page 194
> Tighten lug bolts, page 194
> Drive with space-saver spare tire, page 193
Tire change set for a space-saver
spare tire*
On vehicles with a space-saver spare tire, the
tire change set with onboard tools is stored
under the floor mat in the cargo bay.
1 Chock, folding
2 Hub cover remover
3 Wheel stud wrench
4 Vehicle jack
5 Special wrench for removing the space-
saver spare tire
6 Flat screwdriver/Phillips screwdriver
7 Towing eyelet
8 Lifting handle
The onboard tool kit includes a pouch with a
plastic bag in which you can place the damaged
wheel.
Removing the space-saver spare tire
The screw connection of the space-saver spare
tire is under the floor mat in the cargo bay, on
the base of the storage compartment for the tire
change set.
1. Unscrew the screw connection with the spe-
cial wrench.
2. Take out the cover panel.
3. Screw the lifting handle from the onboard
tool kit onto the thread.
4. Raise the lifting handle slightly.
5. Squeeze the securing spring.
6. The space-saver spare tire is released and
must be held by the lifting handle.
7. Lower the space-saver spare tire with the
lifting handle.
8. Unscrew the lifting handle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
193
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
9. Pull the space-saver spare tire underneath
the vehicle out towards the rear.
10. Position the space-saver spare tire with the
valve facing upward.
11. Unscrew the valve extension from the valve
of the space-saver spare tire.
12. Unscrew the dust cap from the extension
and place it on the valve of the space-saver
spare tire.
Due to its different dimensions, the dam-
aged wheel cannot be placed in the recess
for the space-saver spare tire.<
Driving with the space-saver spare tire
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Changes may
occur in vehicle handling such as lower track sta-
bility during braking, longer braking distances
and changes in self-steering properties when
close to the handling limit. These properties are
more noticeable with winter tires.<
Only one space-saver spare tire may be
mounted at one time. Mount a wheel and
tire of the original size as soon as possible, to
avoid any safety risks.<
Check the tire inflation pressure at the ear-
liest opportunity and correct it if neces-
sary. Replace the defective tire as soon as possi-
ble and have the new wheel/tire assembly
balanced.<
Preparing for a tire change
Observe the safety precautions regarding
flat tires on page 189.<
Additional safety measures when chang-
ing tires:
Only change the tire when parked on a surface
that is level, firm and not slippery.
The vehicle or the jack could slip sideways on
soft or slippery support surfaces, such as snow,
ice, flagstones, etc.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
Do not lie under the vehicle or start the engine
when the vehicle is supported by the jack; other-
wise there is a risk of fatal injury.<
1. Place the foldable chock
* behind the front
wheel on the other side of the vehicle or in
front of the wheel if the vehicle is on an
incline. If the wheel is changed on a surface
with a more severe slope, take additional
precautions to secure the vehicle from
rolling.
2. Uncover the lug bolts if necessary.
If the wheel is equipped with a hub cover,
pry it off using the screwdriver from the tire
change kit.
3. Loosen the lug bolts by a half turn.
Jacking up the vehicle
The vehicle jack is designed for changing
wheels only. Do not attempt to raise
another vehicle model with it or to raise any load
of any kind. To do so could cause accidents and
personal injury.<
1. Place the jack at the jacking point closest to
the wheel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
194
The jack base must be perpendicular to the
surface beneath the jacking point.
2. During jacking up, insert the jack head in the
square recess of the jacking point.
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised off the ground.
Mounting the space-saver spare tire
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Clean the lug bolts.
3. Lift the new wheel into place.
4. Screw at least two lug bolts finger-tight into
opposite bolt holes.
5. Screw in the remaining bolts.
6. Tighten all the lug bolts firmly in a diagonal
pattern.
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. Remove the jack.
Tightening the lug bolts
Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
Immediately have the wheels checked
with a calibrated torque wrench to ensure
that the lug bolts are firmly seated. Otherwise,
incorrectly tightened lug bolts can present a
safety hazard.<
Tightening torque: 103.3 lb ft or 140 Nm.
Replace the defective tire as soon as possible
and have the new wheel/tire assembly bal-
anced.
Vehicle battery
Have any work on the battery, including
battery replacement, carried out only by a
MINI Dealer or a workshop that has specially
trained personnel working in accordance with
the specifications of the MINI manufacturer.<
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate
climate.
Charging the battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle when the
engine is off. Connections, refer to Jump starting
on page 196.
Disposal
After replacing old batteries, return the
used batteries to your MINI Dealer or to a
recycling point. Maintain the battery in an
upright position for transport and storage.
Always secure the battery against tipping over
during transport.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
may not be fully functional and may require ini-
tialization. Individual settings are also lost and
must be reprogrammed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, page 68.
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, page 143.
> Navigation system
Operability must be waited for, page 112.
> Glass sunroof, electric
It may only be possible to raise the sunroof,
if applicable. The system must be initialized.
Contact your nearest MINI Dealer.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
195
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Fuses
Do not attempt to repair a blown fuse or
replace it with a fuse of a different color or
Ampere rating. To do this could cause a fire in
the vehicle resulting from a circuit overload.
Have the fuse changed only by a MINI Dealer or
a workshop that has specially trained personnel
working in accordance with the specifications of
the MINI manufacturer.<
A fuse allocation diagram is located on the inside
of the fuse box cover panels.
In the engine compartment
Opening the cover
Press the latch.
In the vehicle interior
On the right side of the footwell.
Opening the cover
Press out at the recess.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
196
Giving and receiving assistance
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance service is there to assist
you around the clock in the event of a break-
down, including on weekends and public
holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assistance
in your home country can be found in the Con-
tact brochure.
First aid pouch*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any items in good time, if
necessary.
By way of example, the illustration shows the
cargo bay in the MINI.
The first aid pouch is located on the cargo bay
floor by the left side trim panel.
Warning triangle*
MINI
On the inside of the tailgate.
Press the tab to take it out.
MINI Convertible
The warning triangle is located at the bottom of
the luggage compartment floor.
Jump starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your MINI's engine
can be started by connecting two jumper cables
to another vehicle's battery. You can also use
the same method to help start another vehicle.
Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated
clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible per-
sonal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi-
cle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi-
mately the same capacitance in Ah. This
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the support vehicle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
197
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could cause
injury occur.<
1. Open the battery cover in the engine com-
partment to access the positive terminal of
your MINI.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or to a starting-aid terminal of the
vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Body ground in MINI:
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the mi-
nus/– jumper cable to the negative terminal
of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the other vehicle in the
usual manner.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting,
towing away
Observe the applicable laws and
regulations for tow-starting and towing
vehicles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the MINI.
It is stored in the onboard tool kit in the cargo
bay underneath the cover on the right-hand
side, page 185.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow
fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
198
Access to screw thread
Push out the cover of the towing eye out of the
recess in the bumper.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 51, otherwise the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable. Do not
tow the vehicle with just the rear axle raised, as
this would allow the steering to turn. <
There is no power assist while the engine is
off. Thus, braking and steering will require
increased effort.
Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend-
ing on local regulations.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Tow vehicles with automatic transmission
only with a tow truck or with the front
wheels lifted; otherwise the transmission can be
damaged.<
Towing with a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same side
on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to
avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please
observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
Towing with a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
Towing with a tow truck
Have the MINI or MINI Convertible transported
by a tow truck with a so-called lift sling or on a
flatbed.
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts, otherwise damage
may result.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
199
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi-
ble; instead, jump-start the engine, page 196.
Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only
be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles
with an automatic transmission cannot be tow-
started at all.
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, page 51.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
completely depressed and then slowly re-
lease the clutch. After the engine starts, im-
mediately depress the clutch completely
again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Technical data
202
Technical data
Engine data
In the technical data, only the values that differ from the Cooper S are shown for the
John Cooper Works.
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Displacement cu in/
cmμ
97.5/
1,598
97.5/
1,598
97.5/
1,598
Number of cylinders 4 4 4
Maximum power
output
hp 118 172 208
At engine speed rpm 6,000 5,500 6,000
Maximum torque
with overboost
lb ft/
Nm
114/155
–
177/240
192/260
192/260
207/280
At engine speed
with overboost
rpm 4,250
–
1,600-5,000
1,700-4,500
1,850-5,600
2,000-5,100
Overboost briefly raises the maximum torque at high rates of acceleration, e.g. when passing.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
203
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Dimensions
MINI
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 35 ft 10 in/10.7 m.
Figures following the semicolons: values that differ for the MINI Cooper S.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Technical data
204
MINI Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 35 ft 10 in/10.7 m.
Figures following the semicolons: values that differ for the MINI Cooper S.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
205
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Weights
MINI
MINI Convertible
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,568/1,165 2,679/1,215 2,701/1,225
> Automatic trans-
mission
lbs/kg 2,646/1,200 2,723/1,235 –
Approved gross weight
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,384/1,535 3,494/1,585 3,516/1,595
> Automatic trans-
mission
lbs/kg 3,461/1,570 3,538/1,605 –
Approved front axle load
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,830/830 1,918/870 1,918/870
> Automatic transmis-
sion
lbs/kg 1,907/865 1,962/890 –
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,664/755 1,664/755 1,675/760
Approved roof load
capacity
lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/
Liters
5.7 - 24.0/
160 - 680
5.7 - 24.0/
160 - 680
5.7 - 24.0/
160 - 680
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,745/1,245 2,855/1,295 2,877/1305
> Automatic trans-
mission
lbs/kg 2,822/1,280 2,921/1,325 –
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Technical data
206
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Capacities
Approved gross weight
> Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,560/1,615 3,671/1,665 3,693/1675
> Automatic trans-
mission
lbs/kg 3,638/1,650 3,737/1,695 –
Approved front axle load
> Manual transmission
> Automatic trans-
mission
lbs/kg 1,863/845 1,951/885 1,962/890
lbs/kg 1,940/880 2,017/915 –
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,786/810 1,786/810 1,797/815
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/
Liters
6.0-23.3/
170-660
6.0-23.3/
170-660
6.0-23.3/
170-660
Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works
US gal/US quarts Liters Notes
Fuel tank 13.2/– approx. 50 Fuel grade: page 163
including reserve of 2.1/– approx. 8
Window washer system incl.
headlamp washer system –/4.8 approx. 4.5 For more details: page 57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
207
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Short commands for the voice
activation system
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice activation system.
Communication
Navigation
*
Function Command
For additional information, refer to the separate Owner's Manual.
To open phone {Phone}
To dial phone number {Dial number}
To display phone book {A to Z}
To select from phone book {Call ...} or
{Dial name}
To display "Top 8" {Top 8}
Redialing {Redial}
To display "Received calls" {Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" {Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" {Bluetooth}
To open "MINI Contact" {MINI Contact}
To open "MINI Contact Numbers" {MINI Contact numbers}
To open "Nearest MINI dealer" {Nearest MINI Dealer}
Function Command
To open navigation 120 {Navigation}
To display current position 134 {Current position}
To open "Enter address" 114 {Enter address}
To open "New destination" 114 {New destination}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
208
Onboard info
To display "Input map" 119 {Input map}
To display address book 122 {Address book}
To display destination list 121 {Destination list}
To switch on destination guidance 126 {Start guidance}
To switch off destination guidance 126 {Stop guidance}
To display route criteria 124 {Route preference}
To switch on voice instructions 129 {Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions 129 {Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions 129 {Repeat navigation info}
To display arrow view 127 {Arrow display}
To display map view 127 {Map},
{Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}
To open route 124 {Route}
To open "New route" 130 {New route}
To change scale 128 {Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}
To display towns/cities and streets along the
route 129
{Route list}
Function Command
Function Command
To open "Car Data" 62 {Car data}
To display computer 62 {Onboard info}
To display trip computer 63 {Trip computer}
To open speed limit 72 {Limit}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT
209
NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Entertainment
To activate speed limit 72 {Limit on}
To deactivate speed limit 72 {Limit off}
To open stopwatch 73 {Stopwatch}
Function Command
Function Command
Tone control 139 {Audio}
To switch on radio 141 {Radio on},
{FM on} or
{AM on}
To open "FM" 141 {FM menu}
To open "AM" 141 {AM menu}
To open "All stations" 141 {FM all stations}
To select radio station 141 {Station ...} e.g. {Station WNYC} or
{Choose station}
To open "Presets" 141 {FM presets} or
{AM presets}
To select preset radio station 141 {Preset ...}
e.g. {Preset 1}
To open "Manual" 142 {FM manual} or
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency} or
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
To open strongest radio station 142 {AM Autostore}
To open "SAT" 146 {SAT radio menu}
To switch on satellite radio 146 {SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of the satellite radio 147 {SAT radio presets
}
To open "All channels" of the satellite radio 146 {SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of the satellite radio 146 {SAT radio categories}
To open CD player 149 {CD menu}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
210
Setup
To switch on CD player 149 {CD}
To open CD changer 149 {CD changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 149 {CD changer}
To select CD 149 {CD 1...6}
To select track 150 {CD track ...}
To select CD and track 150 {CD 1...6 track ...}
To start sound output for external audio
device 155
{Audio Aux}
Function Command
Function Command
To open setup {Settings menu}
"Display off" 19 {Display off}
To open "Info sources" {Info sources}
To open "Settings" {Settings}
To open "Door locks" 27, 30 {Door locks}
To open "Lighting" 55 {Lighting}
To open "Service requirements" 66 {Service requirements}
To open "Service" 66 {Service}
To display "Check Control messages" 70 {Check Control messages}
To activate speed limit 72 {Limit on}
To deactivate speed limit 72 {Limit off}
To set brightness of Control Display 74 {Brightness}
To open "Units" 60 {Units}
To open "Language" 73, 129 {Languages}
To open "Time" 68 {Time}
To open "Date" 69 {Date}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
From A to Z
212
From A to Z
INDEX
„...“ Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions and
refers you to the page where
these texts can be found.
A
Accessories, refer to Your
individual vehicle 4
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate control 94
"Add to destination
list" 117, 119
Additives
– coolant 177
– engine oil 177
Address for navigation
– deleting 123
– entering 114, 117, 122
– selecting 123
– storing 122
– storing current position 122
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic
climate control 93
Adjusting the sound during
audio playback, refer to Tone
control 139
Air conditioning mode
– automatic climate control 93
– ventilation 94
Air distribution
– automatic 93
Air flow rate 93
– automatic climate control 93
Air pressure, checking, refer to
Tire inflation pressure 164
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 93
Air supply
– automatic climate control 93
– ventilation 94
Air vents 92
Airbags 85
– sitting safely 42
– warning lamp 87
Airing, refer to Ventilation 94
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 163
Alarm system 32
"All channels" 147
"All stations" on the radio 141
All-season tires, refer to Winter
tires 174
Always Open Timer 62
"AM", waveband 138
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 93
Ambient lighting 91
Antenna, care 181
Antifreeze
– coolant
177
– washer fluid 57
Antilock Brake System ABS 76
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 32
Anti-theft system 27
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 205
Approved engine oils 177
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 205
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 97
Arrival time
– computer 62, 63
– destination guidance 126
"Arrow display" in
navigation 127
Ashtray 98
Assistant systems, refer to
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 76
Audio 138
– controls 138
– switching on/off 138
– tone control 139
– volume 139
Audio device, external 97
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 93
Automatic
– air distribution 93
– air flow rate 93
– cruise control 58
– headlamp control 88
– storing of stations 142
Automatic climate control 92
– automatic air distribution 93
Automatic station search 142
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 53
– interlock 53
– overriding selector lever
lock 55
– shiftlock 53
– sport program 54
"Autostore"
– on the radio 143
"AUX" 155, 157
– AUX-In port 155
– USB-audio interface 156
AUX-In port 155
AUX-In, refer to External audio
device 97
Average fuel consumption 61
– setting the units 65
Average speed 62
"Avoid ferries" in
navigation 125
"Avoid highways" in
navigation 124
Avoid highways in
navigation 124
"Avoid tollroads" in
navigation 124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
213
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 205
B
Background lighting, refer to
Ambient lighting 91
Backrests, refer to Seats 42
Backup lamps
– replacing bulb 188, 189
Balance, tone control 139
Band-aids, refer to First aid
pouch 196
Bar, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 198
Bass sounds, refer to Tone
control 139
Bass sounds, refer to Treble
and bass 139
Bass, tone control 139
Battery 194
– charging 194
– disposal 35, 194
– jump starting 196
– temporary power failure 194
Battery renewal
– remote control 35
Being towed 198
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 45
Belts, refer to Safety belts 45
Beverage holders, refer to Cup
holders 98
Blower, refer to Air flow rate 93
Bonnet 175
Bottle holders, refer to Cup
holders 98
Brake Assist 76
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 65
Brake lamps
– replacing bulbs 189
Brake pads, breaking in 102
Brake rotors 103
– brakes 102
– breaking in 102
Brake system 102
– breaking in 102
– disc brakes 103
– MINI Maintenance
System 179
Brakes
– ABS 76
– breaking in 102
– MINI Maintenance
System 179
– parking brake 52
– service requirements 65
Brakes, refer to Braking
safely 103
Breakdown service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 196
Break-in period 102
Breaking in the clutch 102
"Brightness"on the Control
Display 74
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 185
Button for starting the
engine 51
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C
California Proposition 65
warning 5
Can holders, refer to Cup
holders 98
Capacities 206
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 194
Car care 181
"Car Data" 63
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
controls 26
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 97
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car radio, refer to Radio 141
Car wash, care 181
Car washes 181
Care 181
– car washes 181
– car-care products 181
– CD/DVD drives 184
– external 181
– high-pressure washers 181
– internal 183
– leather 183
– manual washing 182
– upholstery and fabrics 183
– windows 182
– wiper blades 182
Cargo area
– capacity 205
Cargo bay 103
– convenient access 34
– cover 104
– lamp 90
– opening from outside 31
Cargo bay, expanding 104
Cargo bay lamp 90
Cargo bay lid, refer to
Tailgate 30
Cargo loading 105
– securing cargo 106
– stowing cargo 106
– vehicle 103
Cargo, securing 106
Carpets, care 183
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 102
"Categories" 147
"CD" 138, 149
CD changer 149
– controls 138
– fast forward/reverse 152
– playing a track 150
– random order 152
– repeating a track 151
– selecting a CD 149
– selecting a track 150
– switching on/off 138
– tone control 139
– volume 139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
From A to Z
214
CD player 149
– controls 138
– fast forward/reverse 152
– playing a track 150
– random order 152
– repeating a track 151
– selecting a track 150
– switching on/off 138
– tone control 139
– volume 139
Center armrest 97
Center brake lamp 189
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
"Central locking" 28
Central locking system 27
– convenient access 33
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Changing bulbs 185
Changing the language on the
Control Display 73
Changing the measurement
units on the Control
Display 65
Changing wheels 192
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 176
Check Control 70
"Check Control messages" 72
Child's seats 48
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 49
Child-restraint systems 48
Chock, folding
– space-saver spare tire 192
Chrome parts, care 183
Chrome parts, refer to
Care 181
Cigarette lighter 98
Cleaning headlamps 57
– washer fluid 57
Clock 60
– 12h/24h mode 69
– hour signal 69
– setting time 68
Closing
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Clothes hooks 98
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 51
Comfort access
– what to observe before
entering a car wash 34
Comfort access, refer to
Convenient access 33
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Compact disc, refer to
– CD changer 149
– CD player 149
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 51
Computer 61
– displays on Control
Display 62
– hour signal 69
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 103
Condition Based Service
CBS 179
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Confirmation signals for
vehicle locking/unlocking 28
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting electrical
appliances 99
Consumption indicator
– average fuel consumption 61
Consumption, refer to Average
fuel consumption 61
Control Display
– settings 64
– switching off/on 19
Control Display, refer to
Onboard monitor 16
Control stick, refer to Onboard
monitor 16
Control unit, refer to Onboard
monitor 16
Controls and displays 10
Convenience operation
– convertible top 29
Convenience start, refer to
Starting the engine 51
Convenient access 33
– replacing the battery 35
Convenient operation
– windows 28
Convertible top 37
Coolant 177
– checking level 177
– filling 177
Coolant temperature 61
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 177
Cooling, maximum 93
Copyright 2
Country of destination for
navigation 115
Cross-hairs in navigation 119
Cruise control
– indicator lamp 13
Cruising range 61
Cup holders 98
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 205
Current fuel consumption 62
"Current position" 134
Current position
– displaying 134
– entering 122
– storing 122
D
Dashboard instruments, refer
to Displays 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 90
Dashboard, refer to Cockpit 10
Data 202
– capacities 206
– dimensions 203
– engine 202
– weights 205
"Date" 70
Date
– setting 69
– setting format 70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
215
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
"Date format" 70
"Daytime running lamps" 89
Daytime running lamps 89
DBC Dynamic Brake Control,
refer to Brake assist 76
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 86
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 28
Defect
– door lock 30
– fuel filler door 162
Defogging windows 94
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 94
Defrosting windows 94
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation
– automatic climate control 94
Destination address
– deleting 123
– entering 114, 117
Destination for navigation
– destination list 121
– entry 114
– home address 123
– manual entry 114, 117
– selecting from address
book 123
– selecting using
information 120
– selecting via map 119
– storing 122
Destination guidance 126
– changing specified route 124
– displaying route 127
– distance and arrival 126
– interrupting 126
– starting 126
– taking detours 130
– terminating/continuing 126
– voice instructions 129
– volume for voice
instructions 129
Destination list for navigation
system 121
Destinations recently driven
to 121
Detour, refer to Driving around
a traffic congestion 134
Differential, breaking in 102
Digital clock 60
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio 144
Dimensions 203
Dipstick, engine oil 176
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 129
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 55
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 122
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 202
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 90
"Display off" 19
Display, refer to Onboard
monitor controls 16
Displays 12
– instrument combination 12
– on the Control Display 16
Displays and controls 10
Displays, care 184
Disposal
– of coolant 177
– remote control battery 35
– vehicle battery 194
"Dist. to dest." 63
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 65
Distance warning, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 75
Diving stability control
systems 76
Door key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 26
Door lock 29
Door lock, confirmation
signals 28
"Door locks" 28, 30
Doors, manual operation 30
DOT Quality Grades 171
Drinks holders, refer to Cup
holders 98
Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill
Start Assist 78
Driving around a traffic
congestion 134
Driving dynamics control, refer
to Sport button 78
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 88
Driving notes 102
Driving off on inclines, refer to
Hill Start Assist 78
Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 127
Driving through water 103
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 102
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 94
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 77
DVD for navigation 112
Dynamic Brake Control DBC,
refer to Brake assist 76
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 76
Dynamic Traction Control 77
E
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 138
Electric power windows
– initializing 36
Electrical malfunction
– convertible top 39
– door lock 30
– fuel filler door 162
– trunk lid 31
Electronic brake-force
distribution 76
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
From A to Z
216
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– convertible top 39
– door lock 30
– fuel filler door 162
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 55
– trunk lid 31
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 196
Engine
– breaking in 102
– data 202
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 61
– speed 202
– starting 51
– starting, convenient
access 33
– switching off 52
Engine compartment 176
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 177
Engine malfunction
– indicator lamp 13
Engine oil
– adding 177
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 177
– approved engine oils 177
– capacity 177
– checking level 176
– dipstick 176
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 65
– MINI Maintenance
System 179
Engine oil level, checking 176
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 202
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 51
Entering address 117
Entering destination 115
Entering intersection 116
Error messages, refer to Check
Control 70
"ESN" 145, 146, 147
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 76
Event data recorders 180
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 102
Exterior mirrors 46
– adjusting 46
– automatic heating 46
– folding in and out 46
External audio device 97
External audio device, refer to
AUX-In port 155
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 197
– for tying down loads 106
F
Fader, tone control 139
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 70
Failure of an electrical
consumer 195
Fast forward
– CD changer 152
– CD player 152
"Fast route" in navigation 124
Fasten safety belts reminder,
refer to Seat belt
reminder 45
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 45
Fastest route for
navigation 124
Filter
– microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 94
Fine wood, care 184
First aid pouch 196
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 51
Flash when locking/
unlocking 28
Flat tire
– Run-Flat Tires 173
– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 81
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 78
– indicating a flat tire 80
– initializing the system 79
– snow chains 79
– system limits 79
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 172
Floor mats, care 183
"FM", waveband 138, 141
FM, waveband 141
Fog lamps
– replacing bulb 187, 189
Folding rear seat backrest 104
Folding roof, refer to
Convertible top with
integrated sliding sunroof 37
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 103
Footwell lamps 90
For your own safety 5
Frequency, selecting
manually 142
Front airbags 85
Front fog lamps 90
– replacing bulb 187
Front seat adjustment 42
Frost on windows, refer to
Defrosting windows 94
"FTM" 82
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor
78
Fuel 163
– gauge 61
– high-quality brands 163
– quality 163
– specifications 163
– tank capacity 206
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 61
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 61
Fuel filler door 162
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 162
Fuses 195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
217
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 95
Gasoline
– refer to Average
consumption 61
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 61
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 163
Gear indicator
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 53
Gear shifting
– automatic transmission 53
– manual transmission 53
Gearshift lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 53
– manual transmission 53
General driving notes 102
Glass sunroof, electric 35
– convenient operation 28, 29
– opening, closing 35
– raising 35
– remote control 28
Glove compartment 96
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 112
Grills 92
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 205
H
Halogen lamps
– replacing bulb 186
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 52
Hands-free system 14
Hazard warning flashers 14
"HD radio" 144
HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 144
Head airbags 85
Head restraints 44
– sitting safely 42
Headlamp control,
automatic 88
Headlamp flasher 55
– indicator lamp 11, 13
Headlamps
– replacing bulb 186
Headlamps, care 182
Heated
– mirrors 46
– rear window 94
– seats 45
Heating
– mirrors 46
– rear window 94
– seats 45
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 106
Height adjustment
– seats 43
– steering wheel 47
Height, refer to
Dimensions 203
High beams 89
– headlamp flasher 89
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulb 186
High Definition Radio, refer to
HD Radio 144
High water, refer to Driving
through water 103
Highways, refer to Route
criteria 124
Hill Start Assist 78
Hills 103
Holders for cups 98
Home address 123
"Home address" in
navigation 124
Homepage 4
Horn 10
Hot exhaust system 102
"Hour memo" 69
"House number" in
destination entry 117
Hydroplaning 102
I
IBOC, refer to HD Radio 144
Ice warning 60
Icy roads, refer to Outside
temperature warning 60
ID3 tag, refer to Information
about the track 150
Ignition 51
– switched off 51
– switched on 51
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 51
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 51
Ignition key, refer to
Integrated key/remote
control 26
Ignition lock 51
Imprint 2
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 83
Indicator lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 90
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 81
Information
– on another location 120
– on country 120
– on current position 120
– on destination location 120
"Information" in
navigation 120
"Information on
destination" 122
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 79
– glass sunroof, electric 35
Installation location
– drive for navigation DVD and
audio CD 112
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 129
Instrument cluster, refer to
Displays 12
Instrument lighting 90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
From A to Z
218
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10
Instrument panel, refer to
Displays 12
Integrated key 26
Integrated universal remove
control 95
Interesting destination for
navigation 120
"Interim time" 73
Interior lamps 90
– remote control 29
Interior rearview mirror 46
– automatic dimming
feature 46
Interlock 53
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 56
Internet page 4
J
Jacking points 193
Jets, refer to Window washer
nozzles 57
Joystick, refer to Onboard
monitor 16
Jump starting 196
Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 196
K
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Key, refer to Keys/remote
controls 26
Keyless go, refer to Convenient
access 33
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Convenient
access 33
Kick-down 54
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 54
Knock control 163
L
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 185
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
Low beams 88
"Language" in navigation 129
"Languages" in
navigation 112
Lashing eyes, refer to Securing
cargo 106
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 121
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system 49
Leather care 183
LEDs light-emitting diodes 186
Length, refer to
Dimensions 203
License plate lamp
– bulb replacement 189
Light switch 88
Light-alloy wheels, care 183
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 186
Lighter 98
– socket 99
"Lighting" 89
Lighting
– lamps and bulbs 185
– of the instruments 90
– of vehicle, refer to Lamps 88
"Limit" 73
Limit, refer to Speed limit 72
Load 105
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 106
Lock buttons of doors, refer to
Locking 30
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 28
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 33
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 28
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Low beams 88
– automatic 88
– replacing bulb 186
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 43
Luggage compartment
– emergency operation, refer
to Manual release 31
– increasing the capacity 105
– opening from the inside 31
Luggage compartment lid
– emergency operation, refer
to Manual release
31
Luggage compartment lid,
refer to Tailgate 30
Luggage compartment, refer
to Cargo bay 30
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 107
Lumbar support 43
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 174
Maintenance, refer to Service
Booklet
Maintenance system 179
Malfunction
– convertible top 39
– trunk lid 31
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 70
Manual mode
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 54
"Manual" on the radio 142
Manual operation
– door lock 30
– fuel filler door 162
– power convertible top 39
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 55
– trunk lid 31
Manual transmission 53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
219
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Manual washing 182
Map
– changing scale 128
– destination entry 119
"Map direction of travel" 128
"Map facing north" 128
Master key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 26
Maximum cooling 93
Maximum speed
– with winter tires 174
Medical assistance, refer to
First aid pouch 196
MENU button 16
Menus, refer to Onboard
monitor 16
Microfilter
– for automatic climate
control 94
– MINI Maintenance
System 179
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
– MINI Maintenance
System 179
Microphone for telephone 14
MINI Internet page 4
MINI joystick, refer to Onboard
monitor 16
MINI Maintenance System 179
Mirror dimming feature 46
Mirrors 46
– exterior mirrors 46
– heating 46
– interior rearview mirror 46
Mobile phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 97
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 97
Mobile phone, refer to the
separate Owner's Manual
Mobility System 190
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to MINI controls
with navigation 16
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 78
MP3, refer to Compressed
audio files 149
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 55
– refer to Wiper system 56
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Music track
– playback, scan 150
– random order 152
– search 150
Muting TV 138
N
Navigation announcements,
refer to Switching voice
instructions on/off 129
Navigation drive, location 112
Navigation DVD 112
Navigation system 112
– address book 122
– changing a route 130
– destination entry 114
– destination list 121
– displaying current
position 134
– entering a destination
manually 114, 117
– last destinations 121
– opening 114
– route display 127
– route list 129
– searching for a special
destination 120
– selecting destination using
information 120
– selecting destination via
map 119
– selecting route criteria 124
– starting destination
guidance 126
– switching off, refer to
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance 126
– terminating/continuing
destination guidance 126
– voice instructions 129
– volume adjustment 129
"Navigation voice
instructions" 112
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 44
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 97
"New address" in
navigation 122
"New destination" 114, 119
"New route" 130
New tires 173
North-facing map 127
Nozzles 92
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 202
Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
From A to Z
220
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket for
Onboard Diagnosis 179
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 163
Odometer 60
Oil consumption 176
Oil level 176
Oil, refer to Engine oil 176
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 194
"On a new destination" in
navigation 120
"On destination" 120
"On location" 120
"Onboard info" 63
Onboard monitor 16
– adjusting brightness 74
– changing date and time 68
– changing language 73
– confirming selection or
entry 18
– displays, menus 16
– menu guidance 17
– operating principles 16
– overview 16
– selecting menu items 18
– status information 19
– symbols 17
Onboard tool kit 185
Opening and closing
– convenient access 33
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
– using the door lock 29
– via the remote control 27
Opening and unlocking
– from inside 30
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Outlets
– refer to Ventilation 94
Output, refer to Engine
data 202
Outside temperature
display 60
– changing unit of measure 65
– on onboard computer 65
Outside-air mode
– automatic climate control 93
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 61
P
Paintwork, care 182
Park Distance Control PDC 75
Parking
– vehicle 52
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 75
Parking brake 52
– indicator lamp 13
Parking lamps, replacing
bulb 187
Parking lamps/low beams 88
Parts and accessories, refer to
Your individual vehicle 4
"Pathway lighting" 89
Pathway lighting 88
"PDC" 76
Personal Profile 26
"Perspective" 128
Pinch protection system
– windows 36
Plastic parts, care 184
Pollen
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 94
Position
– displaying 134
– storing 122
Power convertible top 37
Power failure 194
Power windows 36
Power windows, refer to
Windows 35
"Presets" on the
radio 141, 147
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 81
Pressure monitoring, tires 78
– Flat Tire Monitor 78
Pressure, tires 164
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– windows 36
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 78
R
Radio
– autostore 142
– controls 138
– HD Radio 144
– sampling stations 142
– satellite radio 146
– selecting the frequency
manually 142
– selecting
waveband 138, 141
– station search 142
– stations with best
reception 142
– storing stations 143
– switching on/off 138
– tone control 139
– tuning to station 141
– volume 139
Radio key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 26
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 51
Radio readiness 51
– switched off 51
– switched on 51
Rain sensor 56
"Random all" for audio
mode 152
"Random directory" for audio
mode 152
"Random", random order 152
Range, refer to Cruising
range 61
Reading lamps 91
Rear fog lamp 90
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulb 189
Rear lamps
– bulb replacement 189
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
221
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Rear luggage rack* 107
Rear seat backrest, folding 104
Rear seats
– folding the backrests 104
Rear window heating 94
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 46
Receiving level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 19
Reception
– radio station 144
Recirculated-air mode 93
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 93
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 43
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 73
Refueling 162
Releasing
– bonnet 175
Remote control 26
– battery renewal 35
– convenient access 33
– garage door opener 95
– malfunctions 29, 34
– service data 179
– tailgate 29
"Repeat directory" for audio
mode 152
"Repeat track" for audio
mode 152
Replacement remote
control 26
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 185
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 173
Reporting safety defects 6
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 61
Reservoir for washer
systems 57
"Reset" 80
"Reset" for stopwatch 73
"Reset" for tone settings 140
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 140
Restraint systems
– for children 48
– refer to Safety belts 45
Reverse
– CD changer 152
– CD player 152
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 54
– manual transmission 53
Road map 127
Roadside Assistance 196
Roadside parking lamps
89
– replacing bulb 187
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 65
Roof load capacity 205
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 107
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 198
Route 124
– changing 124, 130
– display 127
– displaying arrow view 127
– displaying map view 127
– displaying town 129
– list 129
– selecting 124
– selecting criteria 124
– taking detours 130
Route selection 124
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run-
Flat Tires 173
Rubber parts, care 183
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 173
Run-Flat Tires 173
– flat tire 80
– new tires 173
– tire inflation pressure 164
– winter tires 174
Runflat Tyres, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 173
S
Safety belts 45
– damage 46
– indicator lamp 45
– reminder 45
– sitting safely 42
Safety belts, care 184
Safety systems
– airbags 85
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 76
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 76
– safety belts 45
Safety tires, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 173
"SAT" on the radio 138, 146
Satellite radio 146
– enabling channel 146
– selecting channel 146
– storing channel 146
Scale for navigation,
changing 128
"Scan"
– sampling radio stations 142
Scan
– CD changer 150
– CD player 150
– radio 142
"Scan all" for audio mode 151
"Scan directory" for audio
mode 151
Screen, refer to Onboard
monitor controls 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 198
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 146
Seat adjustment
– mechanical 43
Seats 42
– adjusting the seats 43
– heating 45
– sitting safely 42
Securing the vehicle
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
"Select as destination" 120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
From A to Z
222
"Select current speed" 73
Selecting an audio source 138
Selecting menu items 18
Selecting the route 124
Selection options for
navigation 124
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 53
Selector lever lock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic, refer to
Shiftlock 53
– overriding manually 55
Selector lever positions
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 53
"Service" 72
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 196
Service data in the remote
control 179
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 179
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 196
Service requirement display,
refer to Condition Based
Service CBS 179
"Service requirements" 66, 67
Service requirements 65
"Set date" 70
Settings
– clock, 12h/24h mode 69
– date format 70
Shifting gears
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 54
– manual transmission 53
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission, refer
to Changing selector lever
positions 53
Short commands for the voice
activation system 207
"Short route" in
navigation 124
Shortest route in navigation,
refer to Selecting route 124
"Show current position" 120
"Show destination
position" 120
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 152
– CD player 152
Side airbags 85
Side turn signal indicator
– replacing bulb 188
Side windows, refer to
Windows 35
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 42
– airbags 42
– safety belts 42
– with head restraint
42
Size, refer to Dimensions 203
Sliding/tilt sunroof
– refer to Glass sunroof,
electric 35
Slipstream deflector, refer to
Wind deflector 40
Slot for remote control 51
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 98
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest storage
compartment 97
Snow chains 174
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
OBD 179
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 99
Song search, refer to Playing a
track 150
Sound output for
entertainment on/off 138
Space-saver spare tire
– changing tires 192
– inflation pressure 164
Spare wheel, refer to Space-
saver spare tire 192
Speaking, refer to Voice
instructions from navigation
system 129
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 177
Speed 202
– with winter tires 174
Speed control, refer to Cruise
control 58
Speed limit 72
– setting 72
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 72
"Speed volume", refer to Tone
control 140
Speed-dependent volume 139
Speedometer 12
Split rear backrest, refer to
Through-loading system 105
Split rear seat backrest, refer to
Expanding the cargo
bay 104
Sport button 78
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 76
"Start guidance" 121, 123
Start menu 17
Start/stop button 51
– starting the engine 51
– switching off the engine 52
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 196
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 51
Starting the engine
– start/stop button 51
Start-off assistance, refer to
– DSC 76
– Hill Start Assist 78
"State / Province" in
destination entry 115
Station, refer to Radio 141
"Status" 66
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 4
Steering wheel 47
– adjustment 47
– buttons on steering wheel 11
– lock 51
– shift paddles 54
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
223
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
"Stopwatch" 73
Stopwatch 73
Storage area
– cargo bay 103
Storage compartment, front
passenger side 98
Storage compartments 97
Storage space
– storage compartments 97
Storage space, refer to
– Luggage compartment in the
MINI Convertible 104
"Store in address book" in
navigation 122
"Store" on the radio 143, 147
Storing current position 122
Storing radio stations 143
Storing the vehicle 184
Storing tires 174
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 97
"Street" in destination
entry 116
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 164
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 52
Switching off the engine
– start/stop button 51
Switching on
– audio 138
– CD changer 138
– CD player 138
– radio 138
Switching on the hour
signal 69
Switching the cooling function
on and off 94
Symbols 4
– Control Display 19
– navigation system 133
– traffic info for navigation
system 133
T
Tachometer 60
Tail lamp, refer to Tail
lamps 188
– replacing bulb 188
Tail lamps 188
Tailgate 30
– convenient access 34
– opening from outside 31
– opening/closing 31
– unlocking with remote
control 29
Tank volume, refer to
Capacities 206
Technical data 202
Technical modifications 5
Telephone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 97
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Telephone call, refer to the
Owner's Manual for the
telephone
Temperature display
– ice warning 60
– outside temperature 60
– setting the units 65
Temperature of coolant, refer
to Coolant temperature 61
Temperature setting
– automatic climate control 93
Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 106
"Text language" 74
The individual vehicle 4
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 189
Three-point safety belt 45
Through-loading system 105
Tightening the lug bolts
– keys 192
– torque 194
Tightening torque, refer to
Tightening the lug bolts 194
"Time format" 69
Tire change set
– MINI Mobility System 191
– space-saver spare tire 192
Tire failure
– Flat Tire Monitor 80
– indicator/warning lamp 80
– MINI Mobility System 190
– Run-Flat Tires 80
– space-saver spare tire 192
– Tire Pressure Monitor 81
Tire inflation pressure 164
– loss 80, 81
– space-saver spare tire 164
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 81
– limitations of system 81
– resetting system
81
– warning lamp 83
Tire pressure monitoring, refer
to Flat Tire Monitor 78
Tire Quality Grading 171
Tires
– age 172
– breaking in 102
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 192
– condition 172
– damage 172
– inflation pressure 164
– inflation pressure loss 83
– minimum tread depth 172
– new tires 173
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 78
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 81
– puncture 80
– Run-Flat Tires 173
– size 171
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 172
– winter tires 174
Tires, FTM 80
Tires with safety features, refer
to Run-Flat Tires 173
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 130
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 139
– middle setting 140
Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
From A to Z
224
Torque 202
– lug bolts 194
Tow bar 198
Tow fitting 197
– screw thread 198
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 197
Tow rope 198
Towing 197
– car with automatic
transmission 198
– methods 198
"Town / City" in destination
entry 115
Tow-starting 197
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 81
Track width, refer to
Dimension 203
Traction control, refer to
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 76
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
information 130
Traffic information for
navigation
– calling up 130, 131
– display on route map 131
– during destination
guidance 134
Traffic information message
list 131
Trailer operation
– trailer loads and gross vehicle
weight 205
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 53
– manual transmission 53
– overriding selector lever lock
for automatic transmission
with Steptronic 55
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 106
Transporting children safely 48
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 172
Treble, refer to Tone
control 139
Treble, refer to Treble and
bass 139
Treble, tone control 139
"Trip computer" 63
Trip computer 63
Trip odometer 60
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 60
"Triple turn signal" 56
Triple turn signal activation 55
Trunk lid
– emergency operation 31
– releasing manually 31
Trunk, refer to Luggage
compartment in the MINI
Convertible 104
Turn signal indicator 55
– front, replacing bulb 187
– indicator lamp 12, 13
– rear, replacing bulb 188
– side, replacing bulb 188
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 203
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 106
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
UTQR 171
"Units" 65
Units
– average fuel consumption 65
– temperature 65
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 95
Universal remove control 95
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 33
"Unlock button" 28
Unlocking
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
– tailgate 34
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 33
Upholstery, care 183
USB-audio interface 156
V
Valve
– dust cap 193
Vehicle
– battery 194
– breaking in 102
– cargo loading 103
– dimensions 203
– Identification Number, refer
to Engine compartment 176
– parking 52
– storage 184
– weight 205
Vehicle jack 192
– jacking points 193
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 134
Ventilation
– air conditioner 94
Vents, refer to Ventilation 94
Voice commands
– overview 20
– short commands 207
Voice instructions from
navigation system 129
– switching on/off 129
– volume 129
Volume 138
– audio sources 138
– speed-dependent
control 139
– voice instructions 129
Volume distribution
– front/rear 139
– left/right 139
Volume of cargo area 205
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 70
Warning triangle 196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
225
MOBILITY AT A GLANCECONTROLSDRIVING TIPSENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATIONREFERENCE
Washer fluid 57
– capacity of reservoir 58
Washer fluid reservoir 57
Waste tray, refer to Ashtray 98
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 103
Waterfall lighting, refer to
Ambient lighting 91
Waveband of radio 141
Wear indicators in tires, refer to
Minimum tread depth 172
Weights 205
Welcome lamps 88
Wheel stud wrench
– space-saver spare tire 192
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 203
Wheels and tires 164
Wheels, new 173
Width, refer to
Dimensions 203
Wind deflector 40
Window washer, refer to
Washer fluid 57
Window washer reservoir,
refer to Washer fluid
– volume, refer to
Capacities 206
Windows 35
– closing 36
– convenient operation 28
– opening 36
– pinch protection system 36
Windows, indicator on Control
Display 16
Windshield
– cleaning 57
– defrosting and removing
condensation 94
Windshield, defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 94
Windshield washer system 56
– washer fluid 57
– washer nozzles 57
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 185
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 56
Winter tires 174
– setting speed limit 72
– storage 174
Wiper blade replacement 185
Wiper system 56
"With highways" in
navigation 124
Word-matching principle for
navigation 125
Work in the engine
compartment 175
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard tool kit 185
X
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
01 41 2 602 081 ue Navi
*BL2602081007*
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG
